WO2023155661A1 - Emlsr模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置 - Google Patents

Emlsr模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023155661A1
WO2023155661A1 PCT/CN2023/073528 CN2023073528W WO2023155661A1 WO 2023155661 A1 WO2023155661 A1 WO 2023155661A1 CN 2023073528 W CN2023073528 W CN 2023073528W WO 2023155661 A1 WO2023155661 A1 WO 2023155661A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
mld
link
frame
emlsr
indication information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/073528
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
林游思
淦明
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN202210504981.8A external-priority patent/CN116669230A/zh
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023155661A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023155661A1/zh

Links

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/08—Access restriction or access information delivery, e.g. discovery data delivery
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W48/00—Access restriction; Network selection; Access point selection
    • H04W48/16—Discovering, processing access restriction or access information
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00—Connection management
    • H04W76/10—Connection setup
    • H04W76/15—Setup of multiple wireless link connections

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communication technology, and in particular to a link status indication method and related devices in enhanced multi-link single radio (EMLSR) mode.
  • EMLSR enhanced multi-link single radio
  • WLAN wireless local area network
  • IEEE institute of electrical and electronics engineers
  • EHT extremely high throughput
  • ML multi-link
  • multi-link communication The core idea of multi-link communication is: WLAN devices that support the next-generation IEEE 802.11 standard, that is, EHT devices have the ability to send and receive in multi-band (multi-band), so as to use larger bandwidth for data transmission, thereby significantly improving Throughput rate.
  • multi-frequency bands include but are not limited to: 2.4GHz Wi-Fi frequency band, 5GHz Wi-Fi frequency band and 6GHz Wi-Fi frequency band.
  • One frequency band is called a link
  • multiple frequency bands are called multiple links.
  • a WLAN device that supports multi-link communication is called a multi-link device (multi-link device, MLD).
  • MLD multi-link device
  • a multi-link device can use multiple links (or multiple frequency bands) to communicate in parallel to make the transmission The speed has been greatly improved.
  • a multi-link device includes one or more affiliated stations (affiliated STA), and an affiliated station is a logical station that can work on one link.
  • the affiliated station may be an access point (access point, AP) or a non-access point station (non-access point station, non-AP STA).
  • AP MLD access point
  • non-AP STA non-access point station
  • 802.11be standard a multi-link device whose affiliated station is an AP is called an AP MLD, and a multi-link device whose affiliated station is a non-AP STA is called a non-AP MLD.
  • EMLSR enhanced Multi-Link single radio
  • the non-AP MLD receives with a single radio (singleradio) on each link, that is, listens to the channel (listening operation) and receives in a 1 ⁇ 1 (1 input, 1 output) manner
  • AP MLD uses orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM) physical layer protocol data unit (physical layer protocol data unit, PPDU) type and non-high throughput (high throughput, HT) repetition (non-HT duplicate)
  • OFDM orthogonal frequency division multiplexing
  • PPDU physical layer protocol data unit
  • HT high throughput
  • the initial control frame (initial control frame) sent by the PPDU type, and other types of frames do not currently support reception.
  • EMLSR mode after receiving the initial control frame sent by AP MLD on the EMLSR link (EMLSR link), the STA of non-AP MLD temporarily switches the spatial stream/receiving antenna on another link to the EMLSR link , forming a 2 ⁇ 2 (2 inputs and 2 outputs) antenna configuration for subsequent data transmission.
  • the listening operation here is defined as clear channel assessment (CCA).
  • the non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode may have multiple (referring to two or more) antennas, and each antenna corresponds to a different STA in the non-AP MLD and works on a different link.
  • the STAs on the entire non-AP MLD or some links of the non-AP MLD may be due to some reasons (including but not limited to: coexistence of different devices or different technologies (coexistence )) appears unavailable. Therefore, when the entire non-AP MLD or STAs on certain links of the non-AP MLD are unavailable for some reason, normal communication will be affected.
  • This application provides a link state indication method and related devices in EMLSR mode, which can enable AP MLD to know the state change of the link of its associated EMLSRnon-AP MLD in time, and avoid the unavailable link of AP MLD in EMLSRnon-AP MLD Send signals to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, thereby reducing the waste of resources.
  • This application provides a non-AP MLD link status indication method and related devices with NSTR capability, which can enable AP MLD to know the status change of the NSTR link of its associated non-AP MLD in time, and avoid AP MLD in non-AP MLD.
  • the unavailable NSTR link of the AP MLD sends a signal to the non-AP MLD, thereby reducing the waste of resources.
  • EMLSRnon-AP MLD (working in) EMLSR mode”
  • EMLSRnon-AP MLD can be used to indicate that one or more links (sites on the non-AP MLD) enter EMLSR mode.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD station entering EMLSR mode can be recorded as "EMLSR STA”.
  • the following content takes the link status indication in EMLSR mode as an example to illustrate, and the link status indication methods in other modes are similar.
  • the present application provides a method for link state indication in EMLSR mode, the method includes: when EMLSR non-AP MLD finds that all links (or STAs on all links) are about to be linked to its associated AP MLD When the link is not available, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD generates the first frame and sends the first frame on any available link.
  • the first frame may include first indication information, which is used to indicate that (all links of) the EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled (disabled) for the AP MLD.
  • the first frame may be a data frame.
  • EMLSRnon-AP MLD disabled means that for the AP MLD associated with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD cannot be used; or, for the AP MLD, it cannot be used with the EMLSRnon-AP
  • the MLD communicates; or, for the AP MLD, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD does not receive or respond to the uplink trigger frame.
  • the EMLSRnon-AP MLD itself can communicate with other non-AP MLDs or single-link STAs, that is, for other non-AP MLDs or single-link STAs, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD is still available .
  • the AP MLD associated with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD cannot communicate with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD.
  • the AP MLD does not know whether the currently associated EMLSRnon-AP MLD is unavailable, so when the AP MLD wants to communicate with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, it will send a signal to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, such as initial control frame.
  • EMLSRnon-AP The link resource of the MLD is occupied or the antenna resource is occupied, and the initial control frame sent by the AP MLD cannot be received correctly, and thus the initial control frame cannot be responded to.
  • the AP MLD cannot receive the response of the initial control frame, and may repeatedly send the initial control frame. However, before the AP MLD sends the initial control frame each time, it will perform channel competition to obtain channel resources to send the initial control frame, resulting in a waste of resources.
  • this application reports that it is unavailable by carrying the first indication information in the data frame, so that the AP MLD can be informed of the relationship with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD in time.
  • Link status changes avoiding AP MLD sending signals to EMLSRnon-AP MLD on unavailable links of EMLSRnon-AP MLD, such as sending initial control frames, thereby reducing waste of resources.
  • the foregoing first frame further includes an uplink multi-user disabled subfield and/or an uplink multi-user data disabled subfield.
  • both the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield are set to 1.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD may send a second frame to the AP MLD on the link that becomes available again. That is to say, after the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the first frame, the method further includes: the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the second frame.
  • the second frame may include second indication information, which is used to indicate that (a certain link of EMLSR non-AP MLD) is available (enabled), or in other words, indicate that (a certain link of EMLSR non-AP MLD) resumes (resume), or instruct the EMLSR non-AP MLD (a certain link) to switch back to the listening operation (switch back to listening operation).
  • the second frame may be a data frame.
  • the second indication information may be carried in the EHTOM control subfield.
  • the two frames may also include an OM control subfield, the OM control subfield includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield, the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield fields are all set to 1.
  • the above-mentioned second indication information is used to indicate that the first link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available, and the first link is for the EMLSR non-AP MLD to send the second frame link.
  • the second indication information may be carried in the EHTOM control subfield.
  • the two frames may also include an OM control subfield, the OM control subfield includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield, the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield
  • the fields are all set to 0; wherein, the uplink multi-user disabled subfield set to 0, the uplink multi-user data disabled subfield set to 0, and the second indication information are used to jointly indicate the first chain of EMLSR non-AP MLD Road is available.
  • the AP MLD is notified through the second indication message; so that the AP MLD can be informed of the EMLSRnon-
  • the links available in AP MLD are convenient for AP MLD to schedule EMLSRnon-AP MLD for uplink transmission or send downlink data to EMLSRnon-AP MLD, etc.
  • the antenna capability configuration of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is asymmetrical, that is, there is one antenna on each link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD, one of which is a conventional antenna, and the other
  • the antenna is a limited antenna; the link where the conventional antenna is located is called a receive capability full link (RX full capability link), and the link where the restricted antenna is located is called a receive capability limited link (RX limitation link).
  • RX full capability link receive capability full link
  • RX limitation link receive capability limited link
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD When the receiving capability of EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, EMLSR non-AP MLD receives multi-user request to send (multi-user request to send, MU-RTS) frame or buffer status report poll (buffer status report poll, BSRP) frame, the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame carries indication information for indicating whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or for indicating Whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by the station is an initial control frame.
  • multi-user request to send multi-user request to send
  • BSRP buffer status report poll
  • this application carries indication information in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or for a certain Whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by the station is an initial control frame; so that the receiving capability of EMLSR non-AP MLD is complete.
  • the EMLSR STA on the link can distinguish whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is Initial control frame to determine your next behavior.
  • the present application provides a link state indication method in EMLSR mode, the method includes: AP MLD receives a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate EMLSR non -AP MLD (all links) is disabled (disabled); AP MLD determines that EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled for AP MLD according to the first indication information in the first frame.
  • the first frame may be a data frame.
  • the above first indication information may be carried in the EHT OM control subfield.
  • the EHT OM Control subfield is an extension of the OM Control subfield in the context of EHT.
  • the first frame may further include an OM control subfield, and the OM control subfield includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and/or an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield. It should be understood that if the first frame includes the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and/or the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield, when the AP MLD reads the first indication information, the uplink multi-user disabling subfield in the first frame can be ignored and/or the value set by the upstream multi-user data disable subfield.
  • both the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield are set to 1.
  • the method further includes: the AP MLD receives a second frame, the second frame includes second indication information, and the second indication information Used to indicate that EMLSR non-AP MLD (a certain link) is available, or indicate EMLSR non-AP MLD (a certain link) resume (resume), or indicate EMLSR non-AP MLD (a certain link ) to switch back to listening operation.
  • the second frame may be a data frame.
  • the second indication information may be carried in the EHTOM control subfield.
  • the two frames may also include an OM control subfield, the OM control subfield includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield, the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield fields are all set to 1.
  • the above-mentioned second indication information is used to indicate that the first link of EMLSR non-AP MLD is available, and the first link is for EMLSR non-AP MLD to send the second frame link.
  • the second indication information may be carried in the EHTOM control subfield.
  • the two frames may also include an OM control subfield, the OM control subfield includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield, the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield
  • the fields are all set to 0; wherein, the uplink multi-user disabled subfield set to 0, the uplink multi-user data disabled subfield set to 0, and the second indication information are used to jointly indicate the first chain of EMLSR non-AP MLD Road is available.
  • AP MLD when the receiving capability of EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available on the link, AP MLD can be sent to EMLSR non-AP MLD in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame.
  • the indication information is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a non-AP MLD or a chip in the non-AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a processing unit, configured to generate a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled for AP MLD; a transceiver unit, configured to send The first frame.
  • the first frame is a data frame.
  • the above first indication information may be carried in the EHT OM control in the subfield.
  • the EHT OM Control subfield is an extension of the OM Control subfield in the context of EHT.
  • the first frame may further include an OM control subfield, and the OM control subfield includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and/or an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield.
  • both the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield are set to 1.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is further configured to send a second frame, the second frame includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available.
  • the second frame is a data frame.
  • the above second frame further includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield, both of which are set to 1.
  • the above-mentioned second indication information is used to indicate that the first link of EMLSR non-AP MLD is available, and the first link is for EMLSR non-AP MLD to send the second frame link.
  • the above second frame also includes an uplink multi-user disabled subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabled subfield, the uplink multi-user disabled subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabled subfield are both set to 0; set to 0
  • the uplink multi-user disabled subfield, the uplink multi-user data disabled subfield set to 0, and the second indication information are used to jointly indicate that the first link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to receive a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, and the MU-RTS frame Or the BSRP frame carries indication information, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be an AP MLD or a chip in the AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, configured to receive a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate that EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled for AP MLD; a processing unit is configured to, according to The first indication information in the first frame determines that EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled.
  • the above first indication information may be carried in the EHT OM control subfield.
  • the EHT OM Control subfield is an extension of the OM Control subfield in the context of EHT.
  • the first frame may further include an OM control subfield, and the OM control subfield includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and/or an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield.
  • both the uplink multi-user disabling subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabling subfield are set to 1.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is further configured to receive a second frame, the second frame includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate EMLSR non-AP MLD (a link of) is available.
  • the second frame may be a data frame.
  • the above second frame further includes an uplink multi-user disabling subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabling subfield, both of which are set to 1.
  • the above-mentioned second indication information is used to indicate that the first link of EMLSR non-AP MLD is available, and the first link is for EMLSR non-AP MLD to send the second frame link.
  • the above second frame also includes an uplink multi-user disabled subfield and an uplink multi-user data disabled subfield, the uplink multi-user disabled subfield and the uplink multi-user data disabled subfield are both set to 0; set to 0
  • the uplink multi-user disabled subfield, the uplink multi-user data disabled subfield set to 0, and the second indication information are used to jointly indicate that the first link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also configured to send an MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, and the MU-RTS frame or carried in BSRP frame
  • the indication information is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a link state indication method in EMLSR mode, the method includes: when EMLSR non-AP MLD finds that the state of all or part of its links changes, such as: for EMLSR non-AP As far as the AP MLD associated with the MLD is concerned, at least one link (site on) in the EMLSR non-AP MLD is unavailable or recovers from unavailable to listening mode;
  • the third frame is sent on the link.
  • the third frame includes fourth indication information, which is used to indicate the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD or the link whose state changes.
  • this application actively reports the changed link or available link, so that AP MLD can know its association in time EMLSRnon-AP MLD available links or links that have changed, so as to avoid AP MLD sending signals to EMLSRnon-AP MLD on unavailable links of EMLSRnon-AP MLD, such as sending initial control frames, thereby reducing resource usage waste.
  • the antenna capability configuration of EMLSR non-AP MLD is asymmetrical, that is, there is one antenna on each link of EMLSR non-AP MLD, one of which is a conventional antenna, and the other The antenna is a constrained antenna. Or there is at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD When the receiving capability of EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available and the link is available, EMLSR non-AP MLD receives MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame, and the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame carries indication information to indicate the MU-RTS frame Or whether the BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a link state indication method in EMLSR mode, the method comprising: the AP MLD receives a third frame, the third frame includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate EMLSR non -A link available in the AP MLD or a link whose status has changed; the AP MLD determines the link available in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the AP MLD when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, the AP MLD carries an indication in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame sent to the EMLSR non-AP MLD Information, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a non-AP MLD or a chip in a non-AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a processing unit, configured to generate a third frame, the third frame includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD or the link whose state changes road; a transceiver unit, configured to send the third frame.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to receive an MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, and the MU-RTS frame Or the BSRP frame carries indication information, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be an AP MLD or a chip in the AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, configured to receive a third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the available link or status of the EMLSR non-AP MLD has changed a link; a processing unit configured to determine an available link in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to send a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, and the MU-RTS frame Or the BSRP frame carries indication information, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame frame.
  • the above-mentioned third frame further includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with non-AP MLD has a state change .
  • the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD supporting EMLSR mode.
  • the state change of the above-mentioned non-AP MLD link includes but is not limited to: EMLSR link disabled, and unavailable in EMLSR non-AP MLD The link becomes an available EMLSR link.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information is specifically used to indicate the existence of the EMLSR link Disabled, or used to indicate that one or more EMLSR links are no longer members of EMLSR links and will not be used by non-AP MLDs in EMLSR mode.
  • the corresponding fourth indication information above is used to indicate the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, or the disabled EMLSR link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • this application reports the state change of its own link and the changed link to AP MLD; so that AP MLD can timely Know which links in EMLSR non-AP MLD are available and/or which links are unavailable, and avoid AP MLD from sending signals to EMLSRnon-AP MLD on unavailable links of EMLSRnon-AP MLD, such as sending initial control frames, thereby reducing Waste of resources.
  • the above third indication information is specifically used to indicate that there is an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD to become (or restore) an available EMLSR link, or to indicate that there is an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD Switch back to listening operation, or to indicate that one or more EMLSR links will be used by non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode and become a member of the EMLSR link, or switch back to listening.
  • the corresponding above-mentioned fourth indication information is used to indicate the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, or the EMLSR link from unavailable to available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • this application also reports to AP MLD the state change of its own link and the changed link so that the AP MLD can know the available links in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD in time, so that the AP MLD can schedule the EMLSRnon-AP MLD for uplink transmission or send downlink data to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, etc.
  • the third indication information is represented by two subfields, one of which is used to indicate the presence of an EMLSR link disabled, and the other subfield is used to indicate An unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD becomes an available EMLSR link.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information is specifically used to indicate that there is an EMLSR link that is disabled, and there is no EMLSR link that becomes available from an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the above third indication information is specifically used to indicate that there is no EMLSR link disabled, and there is an EMLSR link that becomes available from an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the foregoing third indication information and the foregoing fourth indication information may be located in the AP assistance request of the high throughput (highthroughout, HT) control field of the third frame (AP assistance request, AAR) control subfield.
  • This application uses the existing AAR control subfield to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information without designing new Frame format and flow can reduce signaling overhead.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information and the above-mentioned fourth indication information may be located in the Aggregated-control (A-control) subfield of the third frame .
  • This application newly designs a kind of A-Control sub-field to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information, its meaning is clear, and the traditional site will not misread (because the traditional site cannot read the newly designed A-Control sub-field field).
  • the above-mentioned third frame is an EML operating mode notification (operating mode notification, OMN) frame.
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information may be located in the EML control field of the third frame, and the EMLSR mode subfield included in the EML control field is set to 1.
  • the above EML control field may also include one or more of the following information: disabled start time, available start time, disabled end time, disabled duration, EMLSR non-AP MLD available links sending and receiving capabilities.
  • the present application utilizes the EML control field of the EML OMN frame (that is, the third frame above) to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information, because the EML control field is expandable, so it can also carry some optional information; its implementation is more flexible , the information that can be carried is richer.
  • the foregoing fourth indication information is a bitmap, and one bit of the fourth indication information corresponds to one link.
  • a bit in the fourth indication information is set to the first value, it is used to indicate that the link corresponding to the bit is an available link or a link whose status has changed; when a bit in the fourth indication information is set When it is the second value, it is used to indicate that the link corresponding to the bit is an unavailable link or a link whose state has not changed.
  • the first value is 0 and the second value is 0; or the first value is 0 and the second value is 1.
  • This application uses a bitmap to indicate not only available links or links whose status has changed in EMLSR non-AP MLD, but also unavailable links or links whose status has not changed in EMLSR non-AP MLD That is to say, this application can indicate the situation of each link in EMLSR non-AP MLD through the bitmap, that is, available or unavailable; so that AP MLD can determine the available links in EMLSR non-AP MLD .
  • the present application provides a link state indication method in EMLSR mode, the method comprising: after EMLSR non-AP MLD and associated AP MLD enter EMLSR mode by exchanging EML OMN frames, EMLSR non-AP MLD generates the first An EML OMN frame, and send the first EML OMN frame to the AP MLD.
  • the first EML OMN frame can include the EMLSR mode subfield and the EMLSR link bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, and the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link.
  • This application does not need to add a new field (or subfield) to indicate the change of the link state in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, but realizes the notification of the link state change by increasing the function and specific rules of the EML OMN frame; it can make the AP
  • the MLD promptly learns the currently available link of its associated EMLSRnon-AP MLD, so as to prevent the AP MLD from sending signals to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD on the unavailable link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, such as sending an initial control frame, thereby reducing the waste of resources .
  • the antenna capability configuration of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is asymmetrical, that is, there is one antenna on each link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD, one of which is a conventional antenna, and the other The antenna is a constrained antenna. Or there is at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD When the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, the EMLSR non-AP MLD receives MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame, the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame carries indication information, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate that a certain station receives Whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a link state indication method in EMLSR mode, the method comprising: after EMLSR non-AP MLD and associated AP MLD enter EMLSR mode by exchanging EML OMN frames, AP MLD receives the first EML OMN frame, the first EML OMN frame includes the EMLSR mode subfield and the EMLSR link bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, and the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; AP MLD then according to the The first EML OMN frame identifies the links available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the AP MLD when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, the AP MLD carries an indication in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame sent to the EMLSR non-AP MLD Information, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a non-AP MLD or a chip in a non-AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a processing unit, configured to generate a first EML OMN frame after the EMLSR non-AP MLD and the associated AP MLD enter the EMLSR mode by exchanging the EML OMN frame, the first EML OMN frame includes the EMLSR mode subfield and EMLSR link bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, and the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; the transceiver unit is used to send the first EML OMN frame to the AP MLD.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to receive a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available, and the MU-RTS
  • the frame or BSRP frame carries indication information, which is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a certain station is an initial control frame. control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be an AP MLD or a chip in the AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, used for receiving the first EML OMN frame after the EMLSR non-AP MLD and the associated AP MLD enter the EMLSR mode by exchanging the EML OMN frame, and the first EML OMN frame includes the EMLSR mode subfield and EMLSR link bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, and the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; the processing unit is used to determine the EMLSR non-AP MLD according to the first EML OMN frame Links available in .
  • the above-mentioned transceiver unit is also used to send an MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame when the receiving capability of the EMLSR non-AP MLD is fully available on the link, and the MU-RTS
  • the frame or BSRP frame carries indication information, which is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a certain station is an initial control frame. control frame.
  • the above-mentioned first EML OMN frame also includes one or more of the following information: the start time of EMLSR link update, EMLSR non-AP MLD The transmit and receive capabilities of the available links.
  • the present application provides a frame type indication method in EMLSR mode, the method comprising: there is at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability in the EMLSR non-AP MLD;
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD receives MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame, the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame includes indication information, the indication information is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame;
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD determines to receive Whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is the initial control frame.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD may have links with asymmetrical antenna capability configurations, that is, one antenna on each link, one of which has a strong receiving capability and can receive all types of PPDUs; It is a weaker receiving capability and can only receive some types of PPDUs. Because the AP can normally communicate with the EMLSR STA with strong antenna reception capability without using antennas on other links; then the AP does not need to send the initial control frame before sending downlink data to the EMLSR STA with strong antenna reception capability. Therefore, when the EMLSR STA receives a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame, the EMLSR STA cannot confirm whether the received frame is an initial control frame. The antenna/spatial stream is temporarily switched to the working link of the EMLSR STA.
  • this application indicates whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame by adding indication information in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame when the antenna capability configuration of EMLSR non-AP MLD is asymmetrical;
  • the EMLSR STA on the link can distinguish whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, so as to determine the behavior after receiving the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame .
  • the present application provides a frame type indication method in EMLSR mode, the method includes: AP MLD generates and sends a MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame, the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame includes indication information, the indication The information is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame.
  • the AP MLD can send MU-RTS frames or BSRP frames on links with full receiving capabilities, or send MU-RTS frames or BSRP frames on links with limited receiving capabilities. Because the EMLSR STA on the link with limited receiving capability can only receive the initial control frame, the indication information in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame sent on the link with limited receiving capability indicates that the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is Initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be a non-AP MLD or a chip in a non-AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a transceiver unit, configured to receive an MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame, the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame is an initial control frame ;
  • a processing unit configured to determine whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which may be an AP MLD or a chip in the AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip.
  • the communication device includes: a processing unit, configured to generate a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame, the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame is an initial control frame; a transceiver unit, configured to send the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame.
  • the foregoing indication information is located in the public information field of the foregoing MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame.
  • This application carries the above indication information in the public information field, which can solve the problem that STAs on the link with full reception capability cannot distinguish whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame in EMLSR mode with asymmetric antenna configuration .
  • the first user information field of the above-mentioned indication information control frame includes an association identifier 12 subfield; the The indication information is specifically used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame received by the station indicated by the association identifier 12 subfield is an initial control frame.
  • the above control frame includes one or more user information fields
  • the first user information field is a user information field corresponding to the EMLSR station in the one or more user information fields.
  • the EMLSR station is the station that enters the EMLSR mode in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • This application carries indication information in the user information field, which can not only solve the problem that the EMLSR STA on the link with full receiving capability of EMLSR non-AP MLD cannot distinguish whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame; Different information can be indicated for different sites to achieve more flexibility. For example, carrying indication information in the user information field It can be realized that the same MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame for some EMLSR STAs and a common control frame for another part of EMLSR STAs.
  • the present application provides a communication device, specifically a non-AP MLD, including a processor and a transceiver.
  • the transceiver is used to send and receive frames
  • the processor is used to execute program instructions, so that the communication device executes the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device further includes a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, where the computer program includes program instructions.
  • the processor is used to generate a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled for the AP MLD; the transceiver is used to send the first frame.
  • the processor is configured to generate a third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate a link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD or a link whose state has changed;
  • the transceiver is used to send the third frame.
  • the third frame also includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with a non-AP MLD has a state change, and the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD that supports the EMLSR mode.
  • the processor is configured to generate a first EML OMN frame including the EMLSR mode subfield and the EMLSR chain Road bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; the transceiver is used to send the first EML OMN frame to the AP MLD.
  • the transceiver is used to receive a control frame, the control frame includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the control frame is an initial control frame, and there is at least one link with full reception capability in the EMLSR non-AP MLD and At least one link with limited reception capability; the processor is used to determine whether the received control frame is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, specifically an AP MLD, including a processor and a transceiver.
  • the transceiver is used to send and receive frames
  • the processor is used to execute program instructions, so that the communication device executes the method provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device further includes a memory, where the memory is used to store a computer program, where the computer program includes program instructions.
  • the transceiver is configured to receive a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled for the AP MLD; the processor is configured to, according to the first frame In the first indication message, it is determined that EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled.
  • the transceiver is configured to receive a third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate an available link or a link whose status has changed in the EMLSR non-AP MLD;
  • the processor is configured to determine available links in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the third frame also includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with a non-AP MLD has a state change, and the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD that supports the EMLSR mode.
  • the transceiver is configured to receive a first EML OMN frame that includes the EMLSR mode subfield and the EMLSR chain Road bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, and the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; the processor is used to determine the available EMLSR non-AP MLD according to the first EML OMN frame link.
  • the processor is used to generate a control frame, the control frame includes a first user information field, the control frame includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the control frame is an initial control frame; the transceiver is used to send The control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is implemented in the product form of a chip, and includes an input and output interface and a processing circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip in the non-AP MLD.
  • the processing circuit is configured to generate a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled for AP MLD; the input and output interface is used for After the first frame is output and processed by the radio frequency circuit, the first frame is sent through the antenna.
  • the processing circuit is configured to generate a third frame
  • the third frame includes fourth indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD or the link whose state changes the input and output interface outputs the third frame and processes it through the radio frequency circuit, and then sends the third frame through the antenna.
  • the third frame also includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with a non-AP MLD has a state change, and the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD that supports the EMLSR mode.
  • the processing circuit is used to generate the first EML OMN frame, and the first EML OMN frame includes the EMLSR mode subfield and EMLSR link bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; after the input and output interface outputs the first EML OMN frame and processes it through the radio frequency circuit, after The antenna transmits the first EML OMN frame.
  • the input and output interface is used to input the control frame received through the antenna and the radio frequency circuit, the control frame includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the control frame is an initial control frame, EMLSR non-AP MLD There is at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability; the processing circuit is used to determine whether the received control frame is an initial control frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, which is implemented in the product form of a chip, and includes an input and output interface and a processing circuit.
  • the communication device is a chip in the AP MLD.
  • the input and output interface is used to input the first frame received by the antenna and the radio frequency circuit, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that EMLSR non-AP MLD is aimed at AP MLD Disabled; a processing circuit configured to determine that the EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled according to the first indication information in the first frame.
  • the input and output interface is used to input the third frame received by the antenna and the radio frequency circuit
  • the third frame includes fourth indication information
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the EMLSR non-AP MLD available A link or a link whose status has changed
  • a processing circuit configured to determine an available link in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the third frame also includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with a non-AP MLD has a state change, and the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD that supports the EMLSR mode.
  • the input and output interfaces are used to input the first EML OMN frame received through the antenna and radio frequency circuit, the first EML OMN frame comprises EMLSR mode subfield and EMLSR link bitmap, and this EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, and this first EML OMN frame is used for the EMLSR link of notification update; Processing circuit, for according to this first EML OMN frame to determine the links available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the processing circuit is used to generate a control frame
  • the control frame includes indication information
  • the indication information is used to indicate whether the control frame is an initial control frame
  • the input and output interface is used to output the control frame and pass the radio frequency
  • the control frame is sent through the antenna.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which program instructions are stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the program instructions are run on a computer, the computer executes the above-mentioned first aspect or the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores program instructions, and when the program instructions are run on a computer, the computer executes the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect or the above-mentioned The frame type indication method in EMLSR mode described in the fourteenth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product containing program instructions, which, when run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the above-mentioned first aspect, or the above-mentioned second aspect, or the above-mentioned fifth aspect, or the above-mentioned first aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product containing program instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect, or the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect of the EMLSR mode frame type Indicates the method.
  • the AP MLD can be informed of the state change of the link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD associated with it in time, and avoid the AP MLD from sending a signal to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD on the unavailable link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, In this way, the waste of resources is reduced, and on the other hand, it can solve the problem that STAs on the link with full reception capability cannot distinguish whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame in the EMLSR mode with asymmetric antenna configuration.
  • the present application provides a link state indication method, specifically a link state indication method in an NSTR link pair, including but not limited to the following steps:
  • the non-AP MLD generates a third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate available links in the non-AP MLD or links whose states have changed.
  • the non-AP MLD sends this third frame.
  • the present application provides a link state indication method, specifically a link state indication method in an NSTR link pair, including but not limited to the following steps:
  • the AP MLD receives the third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate available links in the non-AP MLD or links whose status has changed.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate whether there is a state change in the link with non-AP MLD; specifically, the third indication information and the fourth indication information
  • the third indication information refer to the previous description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the AP MLD determines available links in the non-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the AP MLD associated with the non-AP MLD determines the available links in the non-AP MLD according to the third indication information and the fourth indication information carried in the third frame.
  • the present application provides a communication device, where the communication device is used to implement the link state indication method in the twenty-fifth aspect or the twenty-sixth aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores program instructions, and when the program instructions are run on the computer, the computer executes the above-mentioned twenty-fifth aspect, or The link state indication method described in the twenty-sixth aspect above.
  • the present application provides a computer program product containing program instructions, which, when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute the link state described in the twenty-fifth aspect or the twenty-sixth aspect Indicates the method.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2a is a schematic structural diagram of a multi-link device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2b is another schematic structural diagram of a multi-link device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of multi-link communication provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 4 is a schematic diagram of communication between non-AP MLD and AP MLD in EMLSR mode
  • FIG. 5 is a first schematic flowchart of a link state indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the frame format of the OM control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7a is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the OM Control subfield and the EHT OM control subfield in the HT Control field provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Figure 7b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the OM Control subfield and the EHT OM control subfield in the HT Control field provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 8 is a second schematic flowchart of a link state indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9a is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the AAR control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9b is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9c is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the EML control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10a is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the AAR control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the AAR control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11a is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12a is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the EML control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the EML control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a third schematic flowchart of a link state indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a frame type indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the frame format of the user information field in the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 16 is another schematic flowchart of a frame type indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of the frame format of the public information field in the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame provided by the embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 20 is a schematic flowchart of the link state indication method in the NSTR link pair provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 21a is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 21b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • a, b, or at least one item (unit) of c which can represent: a, b, c; a and b; a and c; b and c; or a and b and c.
  • a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • words such as “first” and “second” do not limit the number and order of execution, and words such as “first” and “second” do not necessarily limit the difference.
  • words such as “exemplary” or “for example” are used to mean an example, illustration or illustration. Any embodiment or design described in this application as “exemplary”, “for example” or “such as” is not to be construed as preferred or advantageous over other embodiments or designs. Rather, use of words such as “exemplary,” “for example,” or “such as” is intended to present related concepts in a specific manner.
  • B corresponding to A means that B is associated with A, and B can be determined according to A.
  • determining B according to A does not mean determining B only according to A, and B may also be determined according to A and/or other information.
  • system architecture of the method provided in the embodiment of the present application will be described below. It can be understood that the system architecture described in the embodiments of the present application is for more clearly illustrating the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and does not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided by the embodiments of the present application.
  • the technical solution provided by this application can be applied to a wireless communication system, such as a wireless local area network system, and the technical solution provided by this application can be implemented by a communication device in a wireless communication system or a chip or a processor in a communication device.
  • the communication device may be a wireless communication device supporting parallel transmission of multiple links, for example, the communication device may be called a multi-link device (multi-link device, MLD) or a multi-band device.
  • MLD multi-link device
  • multi-link devices have higher transmission efficiency and greater throughput.
  • a multi-link device includes one or more affiliated stations (affiliated STAs).
  • An affiliated station is a logical station that can work on one link or one frequency band or one channel.
  • the affiliated station may be an access point (access point, AP) or a non-access point station (non-access point station, non-AP STA).
  • AP multi-link device AP multi-link device
  • AP MLD AP multi-link device
  • non-AP multi-link device a multi-link device whose affiliated station is a non-AP STA
  • Link device non-AP multi-link device, non-AP MLD.
  • a multi-link device may include multiple logical sites, and each logical site works on one link, but multiple logical sites are allowed to work on the same link.
  • link identifiers can be used to identify a link or a station on a link.
  • the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD can first negotiate or communicate the correspondence between the link identifier and a link or a station on a link. Therefore, in the process of data transmission, there is no need to transmit a large amount of signaling information to indicate the link or the site on the link, just carry the link identifier, which reduces signaling overhead and improves transmission efficiency.
  • the management frame sent by the AP MLD when establishing a basic service set (BSS), such as a beacon (beacon) frame, an association request frame, etc. will carry an element, which includes multiple link identifiers information field.
  • a link identifier information field may indicate a correspondence between a link identifier and a station working on the link corresponding to the link identifier.
  • a link identification information field includes not only a link identification, but also one or more of the following information: a medium access control (medium access control, MAC) address, an operation set, and a channel number. Among them, MAC address, operation set, One or more of the channel numbers may indicate a link.
  • medium access control medium access control
  • the MAC address of the AP is also the BSSID (basic service set identifier, basic service set identifier) of the AP.
  • the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD negotiate multiple link identification information fields.
  • the multi-link association means that one AP of AP MLD associates with one STA of non-AP MLD once. This association can help multiple STAs of non-AP MLD to associate with multiple APs of AP MLD respectively.
  • one STA is associated to an AP.
  • One or more STAs in the non-AP MLD may communicate with one or more APs in the AP MLD after establishing an association relationship.
  • multi-link devices can follow IEEE 802.11 series protocols to realize wireless communication, for example, follow stations with extremely high throughput rate, or follow stations based on IEEE 802.11be or compatible with IEEE 802.11be to realize communication with other devices.
  • other devices may or may not be multi-link devices.
  • the technical solution provided by this application can be applied to a scenario where a node communicates with one or more nodes; it can also be applied to a single-user up/downlink communication scenario, or a multi-user uplink/downlink communication scenario; it can also be applied to In the communication scenario of device to device (D2D).
  • the term “communication” may also be described as "data transmission”, “information transmission” or “transmission”.
  • the term “transmission” can refer to both sending and receiving.
  • any of the above nodes can be AP MLD or non-AP MLD.
  • the technical solution provided by this application is applied to the scenario of communication between AP MLD and non-AP MLD.
  • one or more of the above nodes may also be a legacy site that supports transmission only on a single link, that is to say, in addition to multi-link devices, the above communication scenarios may also include single-link devices , such as a single-link STA.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the wireless communication system includes at least one AP MLD (such as AP MLD100 in Figure 1) and at least one non-AP MLD (such as non-AP MLD200 and non-AP MLD300 in Figure 1).
  • FIG. 1 also includes legacy stations that support transmission only on a single link (such as the single-link non-AP STA400 in FIG. 1, also called STA400).
  • AP MLD is a multi-link device that provides services for non-AP MLD. Non-AP MLD can use multiple links to communicate with AP MLD, so as to achieve the effect of improving throughput.
  • An AP in the AP MLD can communicate with a STA in the non-AP MLD through a link.
  • the AP MLD (one of the APs) can also provide services for the legacy site;
  • the non-AP MLD (one of the STAs) can also perform peer-to-peer (P2P) communication with the legacy site.
  • P2P peer-to-peer
  • the number of AP MLDs, non-AP MLDs and legacy stations (that is, single-link non-AP STAs) in FIG. 1 is only exemplary.
  • FIG. 2a is a schematic structural diagram of a multi-link device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the 802.11 standard focuses on the 802.11 physical layer (physical layer, PHY) and medium access control (medium access control, MAC) layer parts in the multi-link device.
  • the multiple STAs included in the multi-link device are independent of each other at the low MAC (low MAC) layer and the PHY layer, and are also independent of each other at the high MAC (high MAC) layer.
  • FIG. 2b is another schematic structural diagram of a multi-link device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG.
  • Non-APMLD can adopt a structure in which the upper MAC layer is independent of each other, while APMLD adopts a structure shared by the upper MAC layer;
  • the MLD adopts a structure in which the upper MAC layers are independent of each other; it is also possible that both the Non-AP MLD and the AP MLD adopt a structure in which the upper MAC layers are shared; it is also possible that both the Non-AP MLD and the AP MLD adopt a structure in which the upper MAC layers are independent of each other.
  • both the high MAC layer and the low MAC layer may be implemented by a processor in the system-on-a-chip of the multi-link device, and may also be implemented by different processing modules in the system-on-a-chip.
  • the multi-link device in the embodiment of the present application may be a single-antenna device or a multi-antenna device.
  • it may be a device with more than two antennas.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the number of antennas included in the multi-link device.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of multi-link communication provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the AP MLD includes n stations, namely AP1, AP2, ..., APn; the non-AP MLD also includes n stations, respectively STA1, STA2, ..., STAn.
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD can use link 1, link 2,..., link n to communicate in parallel.
  • an AP in the AP MLD can establish an association relationship with a STA in the non-AP MLD.
  • STA1 in non-AP MLD establishes an association relationship with AP1 in AP MLD
  • STA2 in non-AP MLD establishes an association relationship with AP2 in AP MLD
  • STAn in non-AP MLD establishes an association relationship with APn in AP MLD. relationship, etc.
  • the multi-link device (here it can be both non-AP MLD and AP MLD) is a device with wireless communication function, which can be a complete device or can be installed in the complete device
  • the chips or processing systems in the device, etc., and the devices installed with these chips or processing systems can implement the methods and functions of the embodiments of the present application under the control of these chips or processing systems.
  • the non-APMLD in the embodiment of the present application has a wireless transceiver function, can support 802.11 series protocols, and can communicate with the APMLD or other non-APMLDs.
  • a non-APMLD is any user communication device that allows a user to communicate with an AP and thus with a WLAN.
  • non-APMLDs can be tablets, desktops, laptops, notebooks, ultra-mobile personal computers (UMPCs), handheld computers, netbooks, personal digital assistants (PDAs), Mobile phones and other user equipment that can be connected to the Internet, or Internet of Things nodes in the Internet of Things, or vehicle communication devices in the Internet of Vehicles, etc.; non-APMLD can also be chips and processing systems in these terminals.
  • the APMLD in the embodiment of the present application can serve as a non-APMLD device, and can support 802.11 series protocols.
  • APMLD can be communication entities such as communication servers, routers, switches, and network bridges, or APMLD can include various forms of macro base stations, micro base stations, relay stations, etc.
  • APMLD can also be chips in these various forms of equipment and a processing system, thereby realizing the methods and functions of the embodiments of the present application.
  • multi-link devices can support high-speed and low-latency transmission.
  • multi-link devices can also be applied to more scenarios, such as sensor nodes in smart cities ( For example, smart water meters, smart meters, smart air detection nodes), smart devices in smart homes (such as smart cameras, projectors, displays, TVs, stereos, refrigerators, washing machines, etc.), nodes in the Internet of Things, entertainment Terminals (such as wearable devices such as AR and VR), smart devices in smart offices (such as printers, projectors, etc.), Internet of Vehicles devices in Internet of Vehicles, and some infrastructure in daily life scenes (such as vending machines, commercial Super self-service navigation console, self-service cashier equipment, self-service ordering machine, etc.).
  • the 802.11 protocol may be a protocol supporting 802.11be or compatible with 802.11be.
  • each signal is called a spatial stream.
  • the number of spatial streams is generally less than or equal to the number of antennas. If the number of antennas at the two ends of the transceiver is not equal, the number of spatial streams is less than or equal to the minimum number of antennas at the two ends of the transceiver.
  • a 4 ⁇ 4 (4 transmit antennas and 4 receive antennas, also known as 4 inputs and 4 outputs) MIMO system can be used to transmit 4 or fewer spatial streams, while a 3 ⁇ 2 (3 transmit antennas 2 receiving antennas) MIMO system can transmit 2 or less than 2 spatial flow.
  • the present application may follow the relationship between antennas and spatial streams in the MIMO system.
  • Non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode uses one antenna (or single radio) for receiving on each link, that is, the non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode uses one antenna on each link to pair the channel Perform monitoring operation (ie CCA).
  • CCA channel Perform monitoring operation
  • non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode can only receive initial control frames sent by AP MLD in OFDM PPDU type and non-HT duplicate PPDU type with one antenna on each link, and other types of frames do not support reception.
  • the transmitting end uses one antenna to transmit on a certain link, and the receiving end also uses one antenna to receive on this link, a 1 ⁇ 1 (1 input and 1 output) is formed on this link.
  • Antenna configuration When the transmitting end uses two antennas to transmit on a certain link, and the receiving end also uses two antennas to receive on this link, a 2 ⁇ 2 (2 inputs and 2 outputs) antenna configuration is formed on this link.
  • the AP uses one antenna on channel 2 (channel 2, ch2 for short) to send an initial control frame, such as a multi-user (MU) request to send (RTS) frame, the initial The control frame includes a channel switch signal (channel switch signal), which is used to instruct the STA to switch the antenna used for reception.
  • MU multi-user
  • RTS request to send
  • the STA uses an antenna on channel 2 to receive the initial control frame sent by the AP (a 1 ⁇ 1 antenna configuration is formed on channel 2 at this time), and replies with a clear to send (CTS) frame on channel 2, and according to the initial control frame Indicates the channel switching signal in the control frame, temporarily switches the receiving antenna (radio) on channel 1 (channel 1, ch1 for short) to channel 2 to form a 2 ⁇ 2 antenna configuration, and then uses 2 ⁇ 2 antennas to configure it on channel 2 Perform downlink data transmission.
  • CTS clear to send
  • the initial control frame is OFDM PPDU or non-HT duplicate PPDU format, and the rate satisfies one of 6Mbps, 12Mbps, or 24Mbps.
  • the initial control frame is a multi-user (multi-user, MU) request to send (MU-RTS) frame or a buffer status report poll (buffer status report poll, BSRP) frame.
  • MU multi-user
  • BSRP buffer status report poll
  • the non-AP MLD working in EMLSR mode supports the reception of MU-RTS frames and BSRP frames, and when the non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode replies to the initial control frame (such as BSRP frame), only one spatial stream can be used.
  • the non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode may have two different antenna capability configurations.
  • the antenna capability configuration of non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode is symmetrical, that is, the antenna capability is configured as one antenna on each link, and the receiving capability of each antenna is limited, that is, only some types of PPDUs can be received. That is, each antenna is a constrained antenna.
  • the antenna capability configuration of non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode is asymmetrical, that is, the antenna capability is configured as one antenna on each link, and one of the antennas has a strong receiving capability (called a conventional antenna), which can perform Because this antenna can receive all types of PPDUs; other antennas have weaker receiving capabilities (called limited antennas), that is, they can only receive some types of PPDUs.
  • the link where the conventional antenna is located can be called a receive capability full link (RX full capability link), while the link where the restricted antenna is located can be called a receive capability limited link (RX limitation link).
  • EMLSRnon-AP MLD (working in) EMLSR mode”
  • EMLSRnon-AP MLD can be used to indicate that one or more links (sites on the non-AP MLD) enter EMLSR mode.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD station entering EMLSR mode can be recorded as "EMLSR STA”.
  • AP MLD associated with EMLSR non-AP MLD for ease of description, hereinafter referred to as "AP MLD associated with EMLSR non-AP MLD” as “associated AP MLD"
  • AP MLD associated with EMLSR non-AP MLD for ease of description, hereinafter referred to as "AP MLD associated with EMLSR non-AP MLD” as “associated AP MLD”
  • associated AP MLD the entire EMLSRnon-AP MLD or EMLSRSTA May be unavailable for reasons such as coexistence of different devices or different technologies use case.
  • an EMLSR STA in EMLSR non-AP MLD uses non-Wi-Fi technologies such as Bluetooth and other non-AP MLD or other single-link STAs on the current link (that is, the link where this EMLSR STA works)
  • the resources of the current link are occupied at this time, that is to say, the EMLSR STA is in a busy (busy) state, and the associated AP MLD cannot communicate with the EMLSR non-AP MLD on this link (such as sending an initial control frame ).
  • the entire EMLSRnon-AP MLD becomes unavailable, the associated AP MLD cannot communicate with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD.
  • the associated AP MLD cannot communicate with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD on these links.
  • the AP MLD does not know whether the currently associated EMLSRnon-AP MLD is unavailable, so when the AP MLD wants to communicate with one of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD or EMLSRnon-AP When multiple STAs communicate, they will send initial control frames to one or more STAs in EMLSRnon-AP MLD or EMLSRnon-AP MLD.
  • one or more STAs in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD or EMLSRnon-AP MLD cannot correctly receive the initial control frame sent by the AP MLD because link resources or antenna resources are occupied, and thus cannot respond to the initial control frame. Because the AP MLD has not received the response of the initial control frame, it may send the initial control frame repeatedly. However, before the AP MLD sends the initial control frame each time, it will perform channel competition to obtain channel resources to send the initial control frame. This will result in a waste of resources.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD wants to receive a group addressed frame (group addressed frame) of the next target beacon transmission time (TBTT) on a certain link
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD needs to switch the antenna/space stream on other links to this link for reception; or the AP MLD associated with EMLSR non-AP MLD should be at least one transmission delay (transition delay) ahead of time, and stop The frame exchange (frame exchange) initiated by AP MLD on other links, so that the antenna/space stream on other links can be switched to the link that is ready to send the groupaddressed frame for reception.
  • AP MLD does not know which group addressed frame of TBTT on which link EMLSR non-AP MLD is going to receive, so AP MLD may give Some unavailable links send initial control frames, resulting in waste of resources.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a link state indication method in EMLSR mode, when the whole EMLSR non-AP MLD or the EMLSR STA on some of its links are due to some reasons (for example, multi-device or multi-technology coexistence, or EMLSR non-AP MLD -
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD can notify the associated AP MLD of the state change of its own link; when the entire EMLSR non-AP MLD When the EMLSR STA on some of its links is unavailable and ready to return to the listening mode (listening mode), the EMLSR non-AP MLD can also notify its associated AP MLD.
  • the AP MLD can be informed of the state change of the link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD associated with it in time, and the AP MLD is prevented from sending initial control frames on the unavailable link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, thereby reducing the waste of resources.
  • both the AP MLD and the EMLSRnon-AP MLD in this application support the 802.11be protocol (or Wi-Fi7, EHT protocol), and may also support other WLAN communication protocols, such as 802.11ax, 802.11ac and other protocols. It should be understood that the AP MLD and EMLSRnon-AP MLD in this application may also support the next-generation protocol of 802.11be. That is to say, The method provided by this application is not only applicable to the 802.11be protocol, but also applicable to the next generation protocol of 802.11be.
  • the "disabled” and “unavailable” mentioned in this application are all for AP MLD.
  • the "EMLSRnon-AP MLD disabled” mentioned in this application means that for the associated AP MLD, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD cannot be used; or, for the associated AP MLD, it cannot be used with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD.
  • the AP MLD communicates; or in other words, for the associated AP MLD, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD does not receive or respond to the uplink trigger frame.
  • the EMLSRnon-AP MLD itself can communicate with other non-AP MLDs or single-link STAs, that is, for other non-AP MLDs or single-link STAs, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD is still available .
  • the "EMLSR link disabled" and "EMLSR non-AP MLD unavailable link” mentioned in this application means that for the associated AP MLD, these links are unavailable or occupied; or in other words, For the associated AP MLD, it cannot communicate with the EMLSRnon-AP MLD on these links; or, for the associated AP MLD, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD cannot receive or reply uplinks on these links trigger frame.
  • the EMLSRnon-AP MLD can communicate with other non-AP MLDs or single-link STAs on these links, that is, for other non-AP MLDs or single-link STAs, the EMLSRnon-AP MLD These links are still available.
  • a non-AP MLD operating in EMLSR mode operates on a specified set of enabled links between its associated AP MLD (A non-AP MLD may operate in the EMLSR mode on a specified set of the enabled links between the non-AP MLD and its associated AP MLD).
  • This set of specified enabled links applied to EMLSR mode is called EMLSR link (The specified set of the enabled links in which the EMLSR mode is applied is called EMLSR links).
  • EMLSR link (EMLSR link)
  • EMLSR link can refer to a link used by non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode, or a link in non-AP MLD that enters EMLSR mode, or Or in non-AP MLD, perform a listening operation (listening operation) or a link in a listening mode (listening mode).
  • the embodiment of this application mainly introduces how the EMLSR non-AP MLD notifies its associated AP MLD when the entire EMLSR non-AP MLD is temporarily unavailable for some reason; and/or, when the entire EMLSR non-AP MLD or one of its links How does the EMLSR non-AP MLD notify its associated AP MLD when the EMLSR STA is unavailable and ready to return to the listening mode.
  • the cause of the unavailability of the entire EMLSRnon-AP MLD may be: an EMLSRnon-AP MLD has only two links, and the antenna of one link is switched to another link and other non-AP MLD or STA For communication, at this time, for the AP MLD, the entire EMLSRnon-AP MLD is unavailable. Or, an EMLSRnon-AP MLD has multiple links, and the EMLSR STA on some of the links is unavailable, and the ability of the EMLSR STA on the remaining links is also affected, and it cannot correctly receive the initial control sent by the AP MLD frame. This application does not limit the reasons for the unavailability of the entire EMLSRnon-AP MLD.
  • FIG. 5 is a first schematic flowchart of a link state indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna capability configuration of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the embodiment of the present application can be either symmetrical or asymmetrical, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the link state indication method under the EMLSR mode includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD generates a first frame, where the first frame includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the first frame.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD when the EMLSR non-AP MLD finds that all its links (or STAs on all links) are about to be unavailable for its associated AP MLD (for example, the EMLSR non-AP MLD has only two links, where The antenna of one link is about to switch to another link to communicate with other non-AP MLD or STA), EMLSR non-AP MLD can generate the first frame.
  • the first frame may carry first indication information, which is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled (disabled).
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the first frame on any available link. It should be understood that when the EMLSR non-AP MLD has sent the first frame, or after a period of time after sending the first frame, the entire EMLSR non-AP MLD is unavailable to its associated AP MLD.
  • the above-mentioned first frame may be a data frame.
  • the AP MLD receives the first frame.
  • the AP MLD determines that the EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled according to the first indication information in the first frame.
  • the AP MLD associated with the EMLSR non-AP MLD receives the above first frame, and determines that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled according to the first indication information carried in the first frame.
  • the AP MLD determines that the EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled, it may no longer send initial control frames to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD until the EMLSRnon-AP MLD becomes available again.
  • the AP MLD receives the notification that the EMLSR non-AP MLD enters the unavailable state (that is, receives the first frame carrying the first indication information)
  • the AP MLD should not send the initial message to the EMLSR non-AP MLD. control frames until it is notified that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available again.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD when the EMLSR non-AP MLD is temporarily unavailable for some reason, it actively reports the status of its own link (available or unavailable/disabled), so that the AP MLD can be informed of the EMLSR non-AP associated with it in time
  • the state change of the link of the MLD prevents the AP MLD from sending a signal to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD on the unavailable link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, such as sending an initial control frame, thereby reducing the waste of resources.
  • only one notification needs to be sent on one link, thereby saving overhead.
  • the AP MLD when the EMLSR non-AP MLD is temporarily unavailable for some reason, the AP MLD cannot communicate with the EMLSR non-AP MLD. Conversely, the AP MLD can communicate with the EMLSR non-AP MLD only after (a certain link of) the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available again. But according to the existing agreement, AP MLD does not know whether EMLSR non-AP MLD is available again. Then, when there is EMLSR non-AP MLD data in the cache of AP MLD, AP MLD may wait forever, because AP MLD does not know whether EMLSR non-AP MLD is available again, so that AP MLD and EMLSR non-AP MLD cannot Normal communication.
  • the AP MLD is actively notified, so that the AP MLD can communicate normally with the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the embodiment of the present application (such as step S105 and step S106 below) can be implemented independently, of course, the embodiment of the present application can also be implemented in combination with the previous embodiment (step S101-step S104), reuse Figure 5, when this When the embodiment of the application is implemented together with the foregoing embodiments, the embodiment of the present application may be executed after the foregoing step S104, or may be executed before the step S101, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends a second frame, where the second frame includes second indication information, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available.
  • the AP MLD receives the second frame.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD can restore the available link
  • the second frame is sent to the AP MLD on the road.
  • the AP MLD receives the first two frames.
  • the second frame may include second indication information, and the second indication information may be used to indicate that (a certain link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD) is available (available), or in other words, the second indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available.
  • the second indication information is used to instruct the EMLSR non-AP MLD (a certain link) to switch back to the listening operation (switch back to listening operation).
  • the second frame may be a data frame.
  • the STA in the EMLSR non-AP MLD can immediately switch to the listening mode (listening mode) , or wait for a specified time T (such as a short interframe space (SIFS)) before switching to listening mode.
  • a specified time T such as a short interframe space (SIFS)
  • the AP MLD that receives the notification should wait at least one transition delay (the specific waiting time may be a transition delay + a specified time T) Afterwards, send an initial control frame to the EMLSR STA that is available again.
  • the AP MLD that receives the notification can directly send the initial control frame to the EMLSR STA that has been restored, or wait for a specified time T before sending the initial control frame. Send an initial control frame to the available EMLSR STA.
  • the AP MLD can carry the indication in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame sent to the EMLSR non-AP MLD Information, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by a station is an initial control frame.
  • the indication information reference may be made to the descriptions of Embodiment 4 and Embodiment 5 below, which will not be described here.
  • the AP MLD when the EMLSR non-AP MLD or an EMLSR STA on one of its links is unavailable and ready to return to the listening mode (listening mode), the AP MLD is notified through the second indication information; so that the AP MLD can know the EMLSRnon in time - The link available in AP MLD, which is convenient for AP MLD to schedule EMLSRnon-AP MLD for uplink transmission or send downlink data to EMLSRnon-AP MLD, etc.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of the frame format of the OM control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the OM control subfield includes but is not limited to uplink (uplink, UL) multi-user (multi-user, MU) disable (UL MU Disable) subfield and uplink multi-user data disable (UL MU Data Disable) subfield.
  • the UL MU Disable (uplink multi-user disable) subfield and UL MU Data Disable (uplink multi-user data disable) subfield can be used jointly/jointly to indicate whether the single-link non-AP STA can respond to different types of messages sent by the AP. trigger frame. Specifically, when the UL MU Disable subfield is set to 0 and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is also set to 0, it means that the STA allows and will reply to all types of trigger frames.
  • the UL MU Disable subfield When the UL MU Disable subfield is set to 0 and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is set to 1, it means that if the STA receives a basic trigger frame (basic trigger frame), the STA will not reply the uplink multi-user data frame (UL MU Data frame ), but if other types of trigger frames are received, the STA can perform uplink multi-user transmission.
  • the UL MU Disable subfield is set to 1 and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is set to 0, it means that the STA will not perform uplink multi-user transmission no matter what type of trigger frame it receives.
  • the UL MU Disable subfield is set to 1, and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is set to 1, which is reserved.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information may be represented by different values of the same field.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information may be located in the EHT OM control subfield of the high throughput (high throughput, HT) control field.
  • the EHT OM Control subfield is the extension of the OM Control subfield in the context of EHT.
  • the reserved bits in the EHT OM control subfield can be used as a subfield, and different values of this subfield can be used to represent the first indication information and the second indication information; for the convenience of description, the EHT OM control subfield
  • the newly added subfield is called the multi-link device disable/resume (MLD Disable/Resume) subfield.
  • this newly added subfield can also have other names, which are not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the UL MU Disable subfield and UL MU Data Disable subfield under the OM Control subfield can be used to indicate whether the STA responds to certain trigger frames in the case of a single link, so the rules for using the MLD Disable/Resume subfield require Distinguished from the single-link case.
  • FIG. 7a is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the OM Control subfield and the EHT OM control subfield in the HT Control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the EHT OM control subfield includes but is not limited to a 1-bit MLD Disable/Resume subfield. When the MLD Disable/Resume subfield is set to 1, it indicates the first indication information, which is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled (disabled).
  • all or part of the OM Control subfield can be reserved in the HT Control field, and if there are UL MU Disable subfields and UL MU Data Disable subfields, set both the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is 1. Of course, at this time, the OM Control subfield may not exist in the HT Control field.
  • the MLD Disable/Resume subfield When the MLD Disable/Resume subfield is set to 0, it indicates the second indication information, which is used to indicate that all links of EMLSR non-AP MLD are available (available), or indicate that all links of EMLSR non-AP MLD are never available State recovery (resume), or instructs all links of EMLSR non-AP MLD to switch back to listening operation (switch back to listening operation).
  • all or part of the OM Control subfield can be reserved in the HT Control field, and if there are UL MU Disable subfields and UL MU Data Disable subfields, set both the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is 1. Of course, at this time, the OM Control subfield may not exist in the HT Control field.
  • the HT Control field includes the OM Control subfield and the EHT OM control subfield
  • the OM Control subfield includes the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield
  • the EHT OM control subfield includes the MLD Disable/ Resume subfield.
  • the first link is the link through which the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the above second frame. That is, when the MLD Disable/Resume subfield is set to 0 and both the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield are set to 0, it indicates that a link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD resumes from an unavailable state , this link is the link that sends the second frame.
  • the MLD Disable/Resume subfield may not exist in the EHT OM control subfield.
  • a one-bit MLD Disable/Resume subfield is added to the EHT OM Control subfield of the HT Control field to indicate that EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled and EMLSR non-AP MLD is recovered from being unavailable to listening mode; Make the AP MLD know the state change of the link of its associated EMLSRnon-AP MLD in time, avoid the AP MLD from sending the initial control frame on the unavailable link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, thereby reducing Waste of resources.
  • the first indication information and the second indication information are respectively implemented through different fields.
  • the first indication information may be the first indication information and the second indication information may be respectively located in the EHT OM control subfield of the HT control field.
  • the first indication information can be carried in a reserved bit of the EHT OM control subfield.
  • this reserved bit is called a multi-link device disable (MLD Disable) subfield.
  • MLD Disable multi-link device disable
  • the second indication information is carried in another reserved bit of the EHT OM control subfield.
  • this reserved bit is called the multi-link device recovery (MLD Resume) subfield.
  • this reserved bit can also have Other names are not limited in this embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the OM Control subfield and the EHT OM control subfield in the HT Control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the EHT OM control subfield includes, but is not limited to, a 1-bit MLD Disable subfield (that is, the above-mentioned first indication information) and a 1-bit MLD Resume subfield (that is, the above-mentioned second indication information).
  • MLD Disable subfield When the MLD Disable subfield is set to 1, it indicates that EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled (disabled).
  • all or part of the OM Control subfield can be reserved in the HT Control field, and if there are UL MU Disable subfields and UL MU Data Disable subfields, set both the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is 1.
  • the OM Control subfield may not exist in the HT Control field.
  • the MLD Disable subfield is set to 0, it means reserved.
  • the MLD Resume subfield When the MLD Resume subfield is set to 1, it indicates that all links of EMLSR non-AP MLD are available (available), or indicates that all links of EMLSR non-AP MLD resume from unavailable state (resume), or indicate All links of EMLSR non-AP MLD switch back to listening operation (switch back to listening operation).
  • all or part of the OM Control subfield can be reserved in the HT Control field, and if there are UL MU Disable subfields and UL MU Data Disable subfields, set both the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield is 1.
  • the OM Control subfield may not exist in the HT Control field.
  • the MLD Resume subfield when the MLD Resume subfield is set to 0, it indicates reservation.
  • the HT Control field includes the OM Control subfield and the EHT OM control subfield
  • the OM Control subfield includes the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield
  • the EHT OM control subfield includes the MLD Disable subfield field and the MLD Resume subfield.
  • the first link is the link through which the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the above second frame. That is to say, when the MLD Resume subfield is set to 1 and both the UL MU Disable subfield and the UL MU Data Disable subfield are set to 0, it indicates that a certain link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD resumes from an unavailable state, which means The first link is the link that sends the second frame.
  • the MLD Disable subfield and the MLD Resume subfield may not exist in the EHT OM control subfield and .
  • a one-bit MLD Disable subfield is added to the EHT OM Control subfield to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled, and a one-bit Resume subfield is added to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD recovers from being unavailable to listening mode; its meaning is clear.
  • the embodiment of this application mainly introduces that when the EMLSR non-AP MLD or the EMLSR STA on some of its links are temporarily unavailable for some reason, or when the unavailability is completed and the EMLSR STA is ready to return to the listening mode, the EMLSR non-AP How the MLD displays the AP MLD that the notification is associated with.
  • FIG. 8 is a second schematic flowchart of a link state indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna capability configuration of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the embodiment of the present application can be either symmetrical or asymmetrical, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the link state indication method in the EMLSR mode includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD generates a third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate available links in the EMLSR non-AP MLD or links whose states have changed.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the third frame.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD finds that the state of all or part of its links has changed, for example: for the AP MLD associated with EMLSR non-AP MLD, at least one link in EMLSR non-AP MLD The road (station on it) is unavailable or reverted to listening mode from unavailable; EMLSR non-AP MLD can generate a third frame.
  • the third frame may carry fourth indication information, and optionally may also carry third indication information.
  • the third indication information may be used to indicate that a state change occurs on a link with a non-AP MLD, and the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD that supports the EMLSR mode.
  • the fourth indication information may be used to indicate available links or links whose states have changed in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD may then send the third frame on any available link.
  • the state of the link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD changes. It may also be that, before the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the third frame, or a period of time before sending the third frame, the state of the link of the EMLSR non-AP MLD changes.
  • the above non-AP MLD link status changes include but are not limited to: EMLSR link disabling, and unavailable links in EMLSR non-AP MLD become available EMLSR links.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may be used to indicate that there is a state change of a link with non-AP MLD
  • the above-mentioned fourth indication information may be used to indicate a link (EMLSR link) available in EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD through a bitmap, that is, a bit in the bitmap corresponds to a link, when a certain bit in the bitmap When a bit is set to 1, it indicates that the link corresponding to this bit is an available link.
  • the fourth indication information may also indicate an available link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD through a link identifier (link ID), that is, the link identified by the link identifier is an available link.
  • link ID link identifier
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information may be located in the AP assistance request (AP assistance request, AAR) control subfield of the HT control field.
  • the reserved bit in the AAR control subfield can be used to indicate whether there is an EMLSR non-AP MLD link status change.
  • this reserved bit can be called EMLSR link update (EMLSR Link Update) subfield; and the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap (Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap) in the AAR control subfield can be reused to indicate the specific link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • FIG. 9a is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the AAR control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the AAR control subfield includes, but is not limited to: a 16-bit AP link identification bitmap (Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap) and a 1-bit EMLSR link update (EMLSR Link Update) subfield.
  • EMLSR EMLSR link update
  • EMLSR Link Update subfield is set to 0 means that there is a link state change, or whether it is set to 1 means that there is a link state change is not limited by this embodiment of the present application.
  • the link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap is a link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • an indication of a state change of a non-AP MLD link (that is, the EMLSR Link Update subfield) is added to the AAR control subfield, and the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap is reused, but the value of the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap is modified. Meaning to indicate links available in EMLSR non-AP MLD. There is no need to newly design frame formats and processes, reducing signaling overhead.
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information may be located in an aggregated-control (Aggregated-control, A-control) subfield.
  • A-Control subfield may be redesigned to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information.
  • FIG. 9b is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the A-Control subfield includes, but is not limited to: a 16-bit EMLSR Link ID Bitmap and a 1-bit EMLSR Link Update subfield.
  • the value and meaning of the EMLSR Link Update subfield can refer to the description in the aforementioned Figure 9a, and will not be described here.
  • the EMLSR Link Update subfield is set to 1
  • the link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the EMLSR Link ID Bitmap (that is, the fourth indication information above) is the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • EMLSR Link ID Bitmap if all bits in the EMLSR Link ID Bitmap are 0, it means that there is no available link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, that is to say, the number of available links in the EMLSR non-AP MLD is 0, or in other words, the entire EMLSR non-AP MLDs are not available. It should also be understood that the bit set to 0 in the EMLSR Link ID Bitmap indicates an available link, or the bit set to 1 indicates an available link, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a new A-Control subfield is newly designed to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information, the meaning of which is clear, and the traditional site will not misread (because the traditional site cannot read the newly designed A-Control subfield). Control subfield).
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information may be located in the EML control field of the EML operating mode notification (operating mode notification, OMN) frame, and the EMLSR mode subfield included in the EML control field is set to 1. That is to say, the third frame above is an EML OMN frame.
  • the reserved bit in the EML control field can be used to indicate whether there is an EMLSR non-AP MLD link status change.
  • this reserved bit can be called EMLSR Link Update (EMLSR Link Update ) subfield; and the EMLSR link bitmap (EMLSR linkbitmap) in the EML control field can be multiplexed to indicate the specific link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD can also carry some relevant information in the third frame, such as the start time of the state change, the specific capabilities of the EMLSR STA in the available state, etc. .
  • the EML OMN frame carrying the above third indication information and the fourth indication information may also include one or more of the following information: the start time when the state of the link changes, EMLSR non -The sending and receiving capabilities of the links currently available in the AP MLD, etc.
  • FIG. 9c is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the EML control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the EML control field includes but is not limited to: 1-bit EMLSR mode (EMLSR mode) subfield, 16-bit EMLSR link bitmap (EMLSR Link Bitmap), and 1-bit EMLSR link update (EMLSR Link Update) subfield.
  • EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1.
  • EMLSR Link Update subfield refer to the description in FIG. 9a above, and details are not described here.
  • the values and meanings of the EMLSR LinkBitmap refer to the related description of the EMLSR Link ID Bitmap in FIG.
  • the EML control field may also include: a start time (starttime) subfield, and/or supported EHT-MCS (modulation and coding strategy, Modulation and coding strategy) and NSS (space stream number, Number of spatial streams) set (Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set) subfield.
  • starttime subfield is used to indicate the start time when the state of the link changes.
  • the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield is used to indicate the specific sending and receiving capabilities of the currently available link.
  • the design of the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield can adopt the section 9.4.2.313.1 of 802.11be D1.4, which will not be described here.
  • the embodiment of the present application carries the third indication information and the fourth indication information through the EML control field of the EML OMN frame (that is, the third frame), because the EML control field is expandable, so it can also carry some optional information at the same time; its realization It is more flexible and can carry richer information.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD generates and sends a third frame, which includes third indication information, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether there is a link status of the EMLSR non-AP MLD changes; when the third indication information indicates that the state of the link with EMLSR non-AP MLD changes, the third frame also includes fourth indication information, which is used to indicate that in the EMLSR non-AP MLD available links.
  • the third indication information may refer to the relevant description of the EMLSR Link Update subfield in the foregoing implementation mode 1
  • the fourth indication information may refer to the relevant description in the foregoing realization mode 1, and details are not repeated here.
  • the above third indication information is specifically used to indicate that there is an EMLSR link disabled, or to indicate that one or more EMLSR links are no longer EMLSR links Member and will not be used by the non-AP MLD for the EMLSR mode (indicate that one or more EMLSR link will not be used by the non-AP MLD for the EMLSR mode and will not be a member of the EMLSR links).
  • the corresponding fourth indication information above may be used to indicate available links in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, or disabled EMLSR links in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the above third indication information is specifically used to indicate that there is an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the link becomes (or returns to) an available EMLSR link, or is used to indicate that there is an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD to switch back to the monitoring operation, or to indicate that one or more EMLSR links will be non-operated -AP MLD for the EMLSR mode and become a member of the EMLSR link, or switch back to listening (indicate that one or more EMLSR link will not be used by the non-AP MLD for the EMLSR mode and will not be a member of the EMLSR links).
  • the corresponding fourth indication information above may be used to indicate an available link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, or an EMLSR link that changes from unavailable to available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the fourth indication information may be a bitmap, and one bit of the fourth indication information corresponds to one link.
  • a bit in the fourth indication information is set to the first value, it is used to indicate that the link corresponding to the bit is an available link or a link whose status has changed.
  • a bit in the fourth indication information is set to the second value, it is used to indicate the The link corresponding to the bit is an unavailable link or a link whose state has not changed.
  • the first value may be 1 and the second value is 0; or the first value is 0 and the second value is 1; this embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the above fourth indication information may also be represented by a link identifier (link ID).
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may be represented by two subfields, one of which is used to indicate that there is an EMLSR link disabled, and the other subfield is used to indicate that there is an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD that becomes EMLSR link available.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may be specifically used to indicate that there is an EMLSR link that is disabled, and there is no EMLSR link that becomes available from an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the above third indication information may be specifically used to indicate that there is no EMLSR link disabled, and there is an EMLSR link where an unavailable link becomes available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may be specifically used to indicate that there is an EMLSR link disabled, and an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD becomes an available EMLSR link; at this time, the above-mentioned fourth indication information is used to indicate EMLSR Links available in non-AP MLD.
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information are located in the AP assistance request (AP assistance request, AAR) control subfield of the HT control field.
  • the third indication information is represented by a subfield.
  • FIG. 10a is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the AAR control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the AAR control subfield includes, but is not limited to: 16-bit Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap and 1-bit EMLSR Link Disable/Resume (EMLSR Link Disable/Resume) subfield.
  • the EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield (that is, the third indication information above) is set to 1, it indicates that there is an EMLSR link disabled, that is to say, there is an EMLSR link that enters an unavailable state.
  • the link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap (that is, the fourth indication information above) is the EMLSR link disabled in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, and the link corresponding to the bit set to 0 is EMLSR Links available in non-AP MLD.
  • the EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield when the EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield is set to 1, it means that there is an EMLSR link that has entered an unavailable state.
  • the EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield (that is, the third indication information above) is set to 0, it indicates that there is an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD that becomes (or recovers) an available EMLSR link, or indicates that the EMLSR There is an unavailable link switching back to listening operation in non-AP MLD.
  • the link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap (that is, the fourth indication information above) is the EMLSR link from unavailable to available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, and the bit set to 0 corresponds to The links in EMLSR non-AP MLD are unavailable links.
  • the EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield when the EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield is set to 0, it means that there is a link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD that recovers from the unavailable state.
  • you can restore the available EMLSR link in the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap Set the bit to 1 to indicate; set it to 0 for the same reason.
  • the third indication information is represented by two subfields.
  • FIG. 10b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the AAR control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the AAR control subfield includes but is not limited to: 16-bit Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap, 1-bit EMLSR Link Disable (EMLSR Link Disable) subfield, and 1-bit EMLSR Link Recovery (EMLSR Link Resume) subfield.
  • EMLSR Link Disable subfield that is, a sub-indication information in the above-mentioned third indication information
  • the EMLSR Link Disable subfield that is, a sub-indication information in the above-mentioned third indication information
  • the link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap (that is, the fourth indication information above) is the EMLSR link disabled in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, and the link corresponding to the bit set to 0 is EMLSR Links available in non-AP MLD.
  • the EMLSR Link Disable subfield is set to 0, it indicates that the EMLSR link is reserved or does not exist.
  • the EMLSR Link Resume subfield (that is, another sub-indication information in the above-mentioned third indication information) is set to 1, it indicates that an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD becomes (or recovers) an available EMLSR chain or indicate that there is an unavailable link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD to switch back to the monitoring operation.
  • the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap (that is, the above The link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the above fourth indication information) is the EMLSR link that becomes available from unavailable in EMLSR non-AP MLD, and the link corresponding to the bit set to 0 is the link in EMLSR non-AP MLD Unavailable link.
  • the EMLSR Link Resume subfield is set to 0, it means that there is no unavailable link switching back to the monitoring operation in the reserved or EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information are located in an aggregated control (Aggregated-control, A-control) subfield.
  • A-Control subfield can be redesigned to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information; instead of reusing the existing A-Control subfield for other functions .
  • the third indication information is represented by a subfield.
  • Fig. 11a is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the A-Control subfield includes but is not limited to: 16-bit EMLSR Link ID Bitmap and 1-bit EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield.
  • EMLSR Link ID Bitmap can refer to the description of the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap in Figure 10a or Figure 10b above, and will not be repeated here.
  • EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield refer to the relevant description in Figure 10a above, and will not be repeated here.
  • FIG. 11b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the A-Control subfield includes but is not limited to: 16-bit EMLSR Link ID Bitmap, 1-bit EMLSR Link Disable (EMLSR Link Disable) subfield, and 1-bit EMLSR Link Recovery (EMLSR Link Resume) subfield.
  • EMLSR Link ID Bitmap can refer to the description of the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap in Figure 10a or Figure 10b above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the values and meanings of the EMLSR Link Disable subfield and the EMLSR Link Resume subfield refer to the relevant description in Figure 10b above, and will not be repeated here.
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information are located in the EML control field of the EML operating mode notification (operating mode notification, OMN) frame, and the EMLSR mode subfield included in the EML control field is set to 1. That is to say, the third frame above is an EML OMN frame. Because the EML Control field is extensible, the EMLSR non-AP MLD can also carry some relevant information in the third frame, such as the start time and end time of the unavailable state, and the specific capabilities of the EMLSR STA in the remaining available states. In other words, the EML control field can also include one or more of the following information: disabled start time, available start time, disabled end time, disabled duration, EMLSR non-AP MLD available link Sending and receiving capabilities.
  • the third indication information is represented by a subfield.
  • FIG. 12a is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the EML control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the EML control field includes, but is not limited to: a 1-bit EMLSR mode (EMLSR mode) subfield, a 16-bit EMLSR link bitmap (EMLSR Link Bitmap), and a 1-bit EMLSR link disable/ Resume (EMLSR Link Disable/Resume) subfield.
  • the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1.
  • the EMLSR Link Disable/Resume subfield refer to the relevant description in the aforementioned FIG.
  • the EML control field shown in Figure 12a may also include a Start Time subfield and an end time (endtime) subfield One or more of , duration (duration) subfield, and Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield.
  • the Start Time subfield It is used to indicate the start time of the disablement
  • the endtime subfield is used to indicate the end time of the disablement
  • the duration subfield is used to indicate the duration of the disablement
  • the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield is used to indicate the specific sending and receiving of the currently available link ability.
  • the design of the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield can adopt the 802.11be D1.49.4.2.313.1 chapter, which will not be described here.
  • the EML control field shown in Figure 12a may also include The Start Time subfield is used to indicate the available start time, that is, the time when an unavailable link becomes an available EMLSR link.
  • the third indication information is represented by two subfields.
  • FIG. 12b is a schematic diagram of another frame format of the EML control field provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the EML control field includes but is not limited to: a 1-bit EMLSR mode (EMLSR mode) subfield, a 16-bit EMLSR Link Bitmap (EMLSR Link Bitmap), a 1-bit EMLSR Link Disable subfield, And a 1-bit EMLSR Link Resume subfield.
  • the EML control field may also include one or more of the Start Time subfield, the end time (endtime) subfield, the duration (duration) subfield, and the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield.
  • the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1.
  • the value and meaning of the EMLSR Link Bitmap can refer to the description of the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap in Figure 10a or Figure 10b above, and will not be described here.
  • the Start Time subfield, the end time (endtime) subfield, the duration (duration) subfield, and the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield can refer to the corresponding description in the aforementioned Figure 12a, and will not be described here.
  • the link state indication method of the receiving end in EMLSR mode includes but not Limited to the following steps:
  • the AP MLD receives the third frame.
  • the third frame includes fourth indication information, and optionally, the third frame further includes third indication information.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with non-AP MLD has a state change.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD or the link whose status has changed. Specifically, for the implementation manners of the third indication information and the fourth indication information, refer to the foregoing description, and details are not repeated here.
  • the AP MLD determines available links in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the AP MLD associated with the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD according to the third indication information and the fourth indication information carried in the third frame .
  • the AP (or AP MLD) side receives the notification that the EMLSR non-AP MLD (or some of its links) has entered the unavailable state, the AP side should no longer send the EMLSR non-AP MLD on the unavailable link. Send initial control frames until notified that the unavailable link is available again.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD When the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends a notification that the unavailable links are available again, the EMLSR STAs on these available links can immediately switch to listening mode, or wait for a specified time T (such as a short interframe interval (short interframe space, SIFS)) and then switch to listening mode.
  • a specified time T such as a short interframe interval (short interframe space, SIFS)
  • the available link in the EMLSR non-AP MLD is a link with limited reception capability
  • the AP (or AP MLD) that receives the notification should wait at least one transition delay (the specific waiting time may be one transition After delay + specified time T), the initial control frame is sent to the available EMLSR STA.
  • the AP (or AP MLD) that receives the notification can send the initial control frame to the EMLSR STA that is restored to availability without waiting, or wait for a specified time T before sending the initial control frame to the EMLSR STA that is restored to availability .
  • the AP MLD can provide EMLSR non-AP on the link with full receiving capability MLD sends MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame, and carries indication information in it, used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate the MU-RTS frame received by a station Whether RTS frame or BSRP frame is the initial control frame.
  • indication information used to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, or used to indicate the MU-RTS frame received by a station Whether RTS frame or BSRP frame is the initial control frame.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD or some EMLSR STAs on its links are temporarily unavailable for some reason, it actively reports the state changes of its own links, and reports the changed links, so as to Make the AP MLD know in time the state change of the link of its associated EMLSRnon-AP MLD and the changed link, so as to avoid the AP MLD from sending the initial control frame to the EMLSRnon-AP MLD on the unavailable link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, Thereby reducing the waste of resources.
  • the embodiment of this application mainly introduces that when the EMLSR non-AP MLD or the EMLSR STA on some of its links are temporarily unavailable for some reason, or when the unavailability is finished and the listening mode is ready to be restored, the implicitly indicated To notify its associated AP MLD, EMLSR non-AP MLD link status change.
  • FIG. 13 is a third schematic flowchart of a link state indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna capability configuration of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the embodiment of the present application can be either symmetrical or asymmetrical, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the link state indication method in the EMLSR mode includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD and the associated AP MLD enter the EMLSR mode by exchanging the EML OMN frame
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD generates the first EML OMN frame
  • the first EML OMN frame includes the EMLSR mode subfield and the EMLSR link Bitmap
  • the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1
  • the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD sends the first EML OMN frame to the AP MLD.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD and the associated AP MLD enter the EMLSR mode by exchanging EML OMN (the EMLSR mode subfields in the two EML OMN frames exchanged at this time are all set to 1) frames
  • the EMLSR non-AP The MLD may generate another EML OMN frame (for ease of distinction, the EML OMN frame generated at this time is called the first EML OMN frame).
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD may send the first EML OMN frame to the AP MLD on any available link.
  • the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link.
  • the first EML OMN frame includes an EMLSR mode subfield and an EMLSR link bitmap (EMLSR Link Bitmap), and the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1.
  • EMLSR Link Bitmap indicates the subset of available links that non-AP MLD uses in EMLSR mode (The EMLSR Link Bitmap subfield indicates the subset of the enabled links that is used by the non-AP MLD in the EMLSR mode), which can be specified Refer to descriptions of existing standards.
  • the link corresponding to the bit with a value of 1 in the EMLSR Link ID Bitmap will be used by the non-AP MLD in EMLSR mode, and will become a member of the EMLSR link or switch back to listening mode. In other words, the link corresponding to the bit with a value of 1 in the EMLSR Link Bitmap is the current previously available links.
  • the EML control field of the above-mentioned first EML OMN frame may also include one or more of the following information: the start time of the EMLSR link update, the transceiver capability of the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the start time (starttime) subfield can be added in the EML control field to indicate the start time of the EMLSR link update
  • the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield can indicate the specific sending and receiving capabilities of the currently available link.
  • the design of the Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set subfield can adopt the 802.11be D1.4 9.4.2.313.1 chapter, which will not be explained here.
  • the AP MLD receives the first EML OMN frame.
  • the AP MLD determines available links in the EMLSR non-AP MLD according to the first EML OMN frame.
  • the AP MLD receives When the new EML OMN frame sent by the EMLSR non-AP MLD (that is, the first EML OMN frame above) arrives, and the EMLSR mode subfield is still 1, it means that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is not ready to exit the EMLSR mode at this time, so The AP MLD can interpret this new EMLSR mode subfield as the EML OMN frame of 1 (that is, the above-mentioned first EML OMN frame) as a notification of an EMLSR link state change.
  • the AP MLD can then determine the link available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD according to the indication of the EMLSR Link Bitmap in the first EML OMN frame, that is, the link corresponding to the bit whose value is 1 in the EMLSR Link Bitmap.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not need to add a new field (or subfield) to indicate the change of the link state in the EMLSR non-AP MLD, but realizes the notification of the link state change by increasing the function and specific rules of the EML OMN frame; Make the AP MLD know the currently available links of the associated EMLSRnon-AP MLD in time, so as to avoid the AP MLD from sending initial control frames on the unavailable link of the EMLSRnon-AP MLD, thereby reducing the waste of resources.
  • EMLSR non-AP MLD may have links with asymmetrical antenna capacity configuration, that is, there is one antenna on each link, one of which has a strong receiving capability and can receive all types of PPDUs; Weak receiving ability, can only receive some types of PPDU. Therefore, the AP can normally communicate with the EMLSR STA with strong antenna reception capability without using antennas on other links; then the AP does not need to send the initial control frame before sending downlink data to the EMLSR STA with strong antenna reception capability. Therefore, when the EMLSR STA receives a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame, the EMLSR STA cannot confirm whether the received frame is an initial control frame.
  • the antenna/space stream of the EMLSR STA is temporarily switched to the working link of the EMLSR STA. It is understandable that although the AP can normally communicate with the EMLSR STA with strong antenna receiving capability without using antennas on other links, the EMLSR STA may need to use multi-space stream transmission, so even if the EMLSR STA has a relatively strong receiving capability However, there is only one antenna on the working link of the EMLSR STA, and multiple spatial streams cannot be realized; therefore, it may still be necessary to temporarily switch the antennas/spatial streams on other links to the working link of the EMLSR STA.
  • This application also provides a The frame type indication method in EMLSR mode is to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame by adding indication information in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame; so that the EMLSR STA on the link with full receiving capability can distinguish Whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, so as to clarify the behavior after receiving the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame.
  • the embodiment of this application mainly introduces how the STA on the link with full receiving capability can distinguish whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame when the antenna capability configuration of EMLSR non-AP MLD is asymmetrical.
  • Embodiment 4 of the present application may be implemented in combination with any of the preceding Embodiments 1 to 3, or may be implemented separately, which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic flowchart of a frame type indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna capability configuration of EMLSR non-AP MLD in the embodiment of this application is asymmetrical, that is, there is one antenna on each link of EMLSR non-AP MLD, one of which is a conventional antenna, and the other antennas are restricted antennas .
  • the link where the conventional antenna is located is called the RX full capability link
  • the link where the restricted antenna is located is called the RX limitation link.
  • the frame type indication method in the EMLSR mode includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the AP MLD generates a control frame, the control frame includes a first user information field, the first user information field includes an association identifier 12 subfield and indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate the association identifier 12 subfield Whether the control frame received by the indicated station is an initial control frame.
  • the AP MLD sends the control frame.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD receives the control frame.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines whether the received control frame is an initial control frame.
  • control frame is a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame.
  • the multiple links include at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability.
  • the AP MLD can generate and send MU-RTS frames or BSRP frames.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD receives the control frame.
  • the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame includes one or more user information fields.
  • indication information is carried in each user information field.
  • only the indication information is carried in the user information field corresponding to the EMLSR station.
  • the above-mentioned first user information field (referring to each user information field, or the user information field corresponding to the EMLSR site) includes association identifier (association identify, AID) 12 subfields and indication information.
  • association identify, AID association identify
  • the AID 12 subfield is used to indicate the station.
  • the indication information may be used to indicate whether the control frame (ie MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame) received by the station indicated by the AID 12 subfield is an initial control frame.
  • the EMLSR station is the station that enters the EMLSR mode in the EMLSR non-AP MLD.
  • the length of the above indication information may be 1 bit, and when the indication information is set to the first value, it indicates that the control frame (ie MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame) received by the station indicated by the AID12 subfield It is an initial control frame; when the indication information is set to the second value, it means that the control frame (ie MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame) received by the station indicated by the AID 12 subfield is not an initial control frame.
  • the first value is 1, and the second value is 0; or, the first value is 0, and the second value is 1; this embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the above indication information may be represented by one reserved bit of the user information (userinfo) field, and for the convenience of description, the indication information may be called the EMLSR Initial Control (EMLSR Initial Control) subfield.
  • EMLSR Initial Control EMLSR Initial Control
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of a frame format of a user information field in an MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the user information field in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame includes but is not limited to the AID 12 subfield and the 1-bit EMLSR initial control subfield.
  • EMLSR Initial Control subfield When the EMLSR Initial Control subfield is set to 0, it means that the current MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is a normal control frame for the STA indicated by the AID12 subfield; in other words, the station indicated by the AID 12 subfield received MU-RTS frames or BSRP frames are not initial control frames.
  • the EMLSR STA does not need to enter the EMLSR mode, that is, the EMLSR non-AP MLD does not need to switch the antenna/space stream on other (designated) links to the link that received the initial control frame; it only needs to reply The corresponding response frame.
  • the EMLSR Initial Control subfield When the EMLSR Initial Control subfield is set to 1, it means that the current MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame for the STA indicated by the AID12 subfield; in other words, the station indicated by the AID 12 subfield received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is the initial control frame. Therefore, the EMLSR STA that receives the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame and has the same AID and AID12 subfield needs to enter the EMLSR mode, that is, the EMLSR non-AP MLD switches the antenna/space stream on other (designated) links to receive the initial On the link of the control frame, prepare for sending and receiving data.
  • the embodiment of the present application puts the above indication information (that is, the EMLSR Initial Control subfield) in the user information field of the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame, it may occur that the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame simultaneously triggers (trigger ) The case of multiple EMLSR STAs and non-EMLSR STAs.
  • the above indication information that is, the EMLSR Initial Control subfield
  • the STA corresponding to the AID12 subfield is an EMLSR STA, you can change the reserved bit in the User Info field to the EMLSR Initial Control subfield; if the STA corresponding to the AID12 subfield is a non-EMLSR STA, you can also change its The reserved bits of the User Info field are changed to the EMLSR Initial Control subfield, and the value of the EMLSR Initial Control subfield is set to 0 to indicate that the current MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is a normal control frame. (corresponding to the implementation manner in which indication information is carried in each user information field).
  • the STA corresponding to the AID12 subfield is an EMLSR STA, you can change the reserved bit in the User Info field to the EMLSR Initial Control subfield; if the STA corresponding to the AID12 subfield is a non-EMLSR STA, you do not need to modify it Reserved bits in the User Info subfield. (corresponding to the implementation of carrying indication information in the user information field corresponding to the EMLSR station).
  • this embodiment of the present application may only allow the AP MLD to send the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame carrying the above indication information (or the EMLSR Initial Control subfield) on the link with full receiving capability.
  • the embodiment of the present application may also allow the AP MLD to send the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame carrying the above indication information (or the EMLSR Initial Control subfield) on both the link with full receiving capability and the link with limited receiving capability, but the receiving The indication information in the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame sent on the capacity-limited link is set to the first value, indicating that the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame received by the station on the receiving capacity-limited link is an initial control frame . This is because stations on links with limited reception capabilities can only receive initial control frames.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame according to the indication information carried in the user information field. If the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines that the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is the initial control frame, the EMLSR non-AP MLD can switch the antenna/space stream on other (designated) links to receive the initial control frame On the link; to prepare for data transmission and reception.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines that the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame it has received is not an initial control frame, then the EMLSR non-AP MLD can reply the response frame of the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame.
  • the indication information is carried in the user information field of the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame to indicate the MU received by a station. -Whether the RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame; so that the receiving capability of EMLSR non-AP MLD is complete.
  • the EMLSR STA on the link can distinguish whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, so as to determine itself next behavior.
  • carrying indication information in the user information field can indicate different information for different sites, achieving more flexibility. For example, carrying indication information in the user information field can realize that the same MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame for some EMLSR STAs, and a normal control frame for another part of EMLSR STAs.
  • the embodiment of this application mainly introduces that when the antenna capability configuration of EMLSR non-AP MLD is asymmetrical, by carrying indication information in the public information field of the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame, the STA on the link with the full receiving capability Identify whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame.
  • Embodiment 5 of the present application may be implemented in combination with any of the preceding Embodiments 1 to 3, or may be implemented separately, which is not limited in this application.
  • FIG. 16 is another schematic flowchart of a frame type indication method in EMLSR mode provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the antenna capability configuration of EMLSR non-AP MLD in the embodiment of this application is asymmetrical, that is, there is one antenna on each link of EMLSR non-AP MLD, one of which is a conventional antenna, and the other antennas are restricted antennas .
  • the link where the conventional antenna is located is called the RX full capability link
  • the link where the restricted antenna is located is called the RX limitation link.
  • the frame type indication method in the EMLSR mode includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the AP MLD generates a control frame, the control frame includes a public information field, and the public information field includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the control frame is an initial control frame.
  • the AP MLD sends the control frame.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD receives the control frame.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines whether the received control frame is an initial control frame.
  • control frame is a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame.
  • the multiple links include at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability.
  • the AP MLD can generate and send MU-RTS frames or BSRP frames.
  • the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame may include a common information field, and the common information field includes indication information for indicating whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD receives the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame, and determines whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame it has received is an initial control frame according to the indication of the public information field.
  • the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines that the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is the initial control frame, the EMLSR non-AP MLD can switch the antenna/space stream on other (designated) links to receive the initial control frame On the link; to prepare for data transmission and reception. If the EMLSR non-AP MLD determines that the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame it has received is not an initial control frame, then the EMLSR non-AP MLD can reply the response frame of the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame.
  • the length of the above indication information may be 1 bit, and when the indication information is set to the first value, it means that the control frame (ie MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame) is an initial control frame; when the indication information is set to When the second value is used, it indicates that the control frame (ie, MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame) is not an initial control frame.
  • the first value is 1, and the second value is 0; or, the first value is 0, and the second value is 1; this embodiment of the present application does not limit it.
  • the above indication information may be represented by 1 reserved bit of the common information (Common Info) field, and for the convenience of description, the indication information may be called an EMLSR initial control (EMLSR Initial Control) subfield.
  • EMLSR Initial Control EMLSR Initial Control
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of a frame format of a common information field in an MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the common information field in the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame includes but not limited to a 1-bit EMLSR initial control subfield.
  • the EMLSR Initial Control subfield When the EMLSR Initial Control subfield is set to 0, it means that the current MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is a normal control frame, and the EMLSR STA that receives the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame does not need to enter the EMLSR mode, but only needs to reply the corresponding response frame.
  • the EMLSR Initial Control subfield When the EMLSR Initial Control subfield is set to 1, it means that the current MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, and the EMLSR STA that receives the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame needs to enter the EMLSR mode, That is, the EMLSR non-AP MLD switches the antenna/space stream on other (designated) links to the link receiving the initial control frame, and prepares for data transmission and reception.
  • the embodiment of the present application puts the above-mentioned indication information (that is, the EMLSR Initial Control subfield) in the Common Info field of the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame, so each STA that receives the MU-RTS frame or the BSRP frame Can read this indication information (ie EMLSR Initial Control subfield), so this indication information (ie EMLSR Initial Control subfield) is used to uniformly indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame currently received by all STAs is an initial control frame .
  • the indication information that is, the EMLSR Initial Control subfield
  • the EMLSR Initial Control subfield can be ignored; if the STA receiving the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an EMLSR STA, follow the EMLSR Initial Control subfield The value of the field reacts accordingly.
  • the indication information is carried in the public information field of the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame to indicate whether the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame; it can solve the problem of receiving in EMLSR mode with asymmetric antenna configuration
  • the STA on the full-capability link cannot tell whether the received MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame is an initial control frame, so that EMLSR non-AP MLD can clarify its own behavior after receiving the MU-RTS frame or BSRP frame.
  • two links in the non-AP MLD may not be able to transmit and receive at the same time, that is, when the STA on one link is transmitting, the STA on the other link cannot meet the reception requirements of EHT , so a nonsimultaneous transmit and receive (Nonsimultaneous Transmit and Receive, NSTR) capability is introduced.
  • NSTR Nonsimultaneous Transmit and Receive
  • the non-AP MLD and its associated AP MLD must ensure that the transmission time of STAs on one of the links will not be different from that of STAs on the other link. The receive times overlap.
  • STAs on some links with NSTR capabilities of the non-AP MLD may be due to some reasons (including but not limited to: point-to-point transmission (P2P), that is, the The STA communicates with devices other than its associated AP MLD on this link) and becomes unavailable. Therefore, when the STA on some link with NSTR capability of non-AP MLD is unavailable for some reason, if the associated AP MLD still initiates transmission to the STA, normal communication will be affected.
  • P2P point-to-point transmission
  • the link state indication method provided in the embodiment of the present application can also solve the above problem, and refer to Embodiment 6 for details.
  • the embodiment of this application mainly introduces that if some link pairs (link pair) of non-AP MLD have NSTR capability, that is, NSTR link pair, and a certain STA on the NSTR link pair is temporarily unavailable due to some reasons, or the end is unavailable When used, how the non-AP MLD notifies its associated AP MLD.
  • NSTR link pair refers to: For two links in MLD, if the STA on one link of the MLD is transmitting, and the STA on the other link cannot meet the receiving requirements of EHT, then the two Links form an NSTR link pair.
  • a certain STA (STA1) on a certain NSTR link pair of non-AP MLD may establish a P2P connection with other non-AP MLD STA or non-AP STA (STA3), such as channel direct link establishment (Tunneled Direct-link Setup, TDLS).
  • STA1 initiates a transmission to STA3
  • the AP MLD associated with the non-AP MLD does not know this transmission. Therefore, when STA1 performs P2P transmission to STA3, the associated AP MLD may initiate transmission to another STA (STA2) on this NSTR link pair at the same time. Due to the characteristics of NSTR, STA2 cannot normally receive the data sent by AP MLD at this time.
  • link state indication method provided by the present application, specifically, the link (hereinafter referred to as link) state indication method in the NSTR link pair includes but is not limited to the following steps:
  • the non-AP MLD generates a third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate available links or links whose states have changed in the non-AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD sends the third frame.
  • non-AP MLDs can generate a third frame.
  • the third frame may carry fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information may be used to indicate available links in the non-AP MLD or links whose states have changed.
  • the third frame may also carry third indication information, and the third indication information may be used to indicate whether there is a state change of a non-AP MLD link.
  • the non-AP MLD MAY send the third frame on any available link.
  • the state of the link of the non-AP MLD changes. It may also be that, before the non-AP MLD sends the third frame, or a period of time before sending the third frame, the state of the link of the non-AP MLD changes.
  • the state change of the above non-AP MLD link includes but is not limited to: link disabling, and an unavailable NSTR link in the non-AP MLD becomes an available link.
  • the above-mentioned third indication information may be used to indicate that there is a state change of a link in the non-AP MLD
  • the above-mentioned fourth indication information may be used to indicate a link available in the non-AP MLD.
  • the fourth indication information may indicate the links available in the non-AP MLD through a bitmap, that is, a bit in the bitmap corresponds to a link, when a bit in the bitmap When it is set to 1, it means that the link corresponding to this bit is an available link.
  • the fourth indication information may also use a link identifier (link ID) to indicate an available link in the non-AP MLD, that is, the link identified by the link ID is an available link.
  • link ID link identifier
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information may be located in the AP assistance request (AP assistance request, AAR) control subfield of the HT control field.
  • the reserved bit in the AAR control subfield can be used to indicate whether there is a change in the state of the link of the non-AP MLD.
  • this reserved bit can be called the link update (Link Update) subfield field; and the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap in the AAR control subfield can be reused to indicate the specific link available in the non-AP MLD.
  • FIG. 21a is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the AAR control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the AAR control subfield includes, but is not limited to: an AP link identification bitmap (Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap) and a link update (Link Update) subfield.
  • the AP link identification bitmap can be 16 bits; link update The subfield can be 1 bit; among them, when the Link Update subfield is set to 1 (that is, the third indication information above), it indicates that the state of the link with non-AP MLD has changed, that is to say, the link may be unavailable or recovery available.
  • the Link Update subfield is set to 0, it indicates that there is no link status change.
  • the Link Update subfield is set to 0 indicates that there is a link state change, or whether it is set to 1 indicates that there is a link state change is not limited by this embodiment of the present application.
  • the Link Update subfield is set to 1
  • the link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap (that is, the fourth indication information above) is a link available in the non-AP MLD. It should be understood that if all the bits in the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap are 0, it means that all links of the non-AP MLD are unavailable, or that there are no available links, that is, the links available in the non-AP MLD The number is 0, or in other words, the entire non-AP MLD is unavailable.
  • an indication of a state change of a non-AP MLD link ie, the Link Update subfield
  • the Link Update subfield is added to the AAR control subfield, and the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap is reused, but the meaning of the Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap is modified to indicate the links available in the non-AP MLD.
  • the third indication information and the fourth indication information may be located in an aggregated-control (Aggregated-control, A-control) subfield.
  • A-Control subfield may be redesigned to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information.
  • FIG. 21b is a schematic diagram of a frame format of the A-Control subfield provided by the embodiment of the present application.
  • the A-Control subfield includes but is not limited to: Link ID Bitmap (Link ID Bitmap) and Link Update (Link Update) subfields.
  • the link identification bitmap may be 16 bits; the link update subfield may be 1 bit.
  • the value and meaning of the Link Update subfield can refer to the description in the foregoing Figure 9a, and will not be described here.
  • the Link Update subfield is set to 1
  • the link corresponding to the bit set to 1 in the Link ID Bitmap is a link available in the non-AP MLD.
  • the Link ID Bitmap indicates an available link, or the bit set to 1 indicates an available link, which is not limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • a new A-Control subfield is newly designed to carry the third indication information and the fourth indication information, the meaning of which is clear, and the traditional site will not misread (because the traditional site cannot read the newly designed A-Control subfield). Control subfield).
  • the link status indication method of the receiving end includes but not limited to the following steps :
  • the AP MLD receives the third frame.
  • the third frame includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate available links in the non-AP MLD or links whose states have changed.
  • the third frame also includes third indication information, the third indication information is used to indicate whether there is a state change in the link with non-AP MLD; specifically, the third indication information and the fourth indication information
  • the implementation method refer to the previous description, which will not be repeated here.
  • the AP MLD determines available links in the non-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the AP MLD associated with the non-AP MLD receives the above-mentioned third frame, according to the third indication information and the fourth indication information carried in the third frame, determine the link available in the non-AP MLD; Specifically, the AP MLD may first obtain whether the state of the link of the non-AP MLD has changed according to the third indication information, and then combine the fourth indication information to obtain the link available in the non-AP MLD or the link whose state has changed.
  • the AP or AP MLD
  • receives a notification that a non-AP MLD (or some of its links) has entered an unavailable state the AP should no longer send an initial message to the non-AP MLD on the unavailable link. control frame until it receives a notification that the unavailable link is available again.
  • the normal sending and receiving state can be restored immediately, or the normal sending and receiving state can be restored after waiting for a specified time T (for example, a short interframe space (SIFS)).
  • a specified time T for example, a short interframe space (SIFS)
  • the STA on the non-AP MLD or some of its links when the STA on the non-AP MLD or some of its links is temporarily unavailable for some reason, it actively reports the status change of its own link, and reports the changed link, so that the AP The MLD is informed of the state change of the link of its associated non-AP MLD and the changed link in time, so as to prevent the AP MLD from initiating transmission to the non-AP MLD on the unavailable link of the non-AP MLD, thereby reducing resource consumption waste.
  • the embodiment of the present application can divide the functional modules of AP MLD and non-AP MLD according to the above method example, for example, each functional module can be divided corresponding to each function, and two or more functions can also be integrated into one processing module middle.
  • the above-mentioned integrated modules can be implemented in the form of hardware or in the form of software function modules. It should be noted that the division of modules in the embodiment of the present application is schematic, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • the communication device according to the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 . Wherein, the communication device is AP MLD and non-AP MLD, further, the communication device can be a device in AP MLD; or, the communication device is a device in non-AP MLD.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device includes a processing unit 11 and a transceiver unit 12 .
  • the communication device may be a non-AP MLD or a chip in the non-AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip. That is, the communication device can be used to perform the steps or functions performed by the non-AP MLD in the above method embodiments.
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to generate a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled for the AP MLD; the transceiver unit 12, Used to send this first frame.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is further configured to send a second frame, where the second frame includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available.
  • the communication device in the first design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned first embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the aforementioned first embodiment, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to generate a third frame, the third frame includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the link or state available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD changes. link; the transceiver unit 12, configured to send the third frame.
  • the third frame further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with non-AP MLD has a state change.
  • the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD supporting EMLSR mode.
  • the communication device in the second design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned second embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the aforementioned second embodiment, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to generate a first EML OMN frame after the EMLSR non-AP MLD and the associated AP MLD enter the EMLSR mode by exchanging EML OMN frames, and the first EML OMN frame includes the EMLSR mode sub-frame Field and EMLSR link bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; the transceiver unit 12 is used to send the first EML OMN frame to the AP MLD.
  • the communication device in the third design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned third embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are to realize the corresponding operations of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the aforementioned third embodiment, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to receive a control frame, the control frame includes a first user information field, and the first user information field includes an association identifier 12 subfield and indication information, and the indication information is used for Indicates whether the control frame received by the station indicated by the association identifier 12 subfield is an initial control frame, and there is at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability in the EMLSR non-AP MLD; the processing unit 11. It is used to determine whether the received control frame is an initial control frame.
  • the control frame is a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame.
  • the communication device in the fourth design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned fourth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the aforementioned fourth embodiment, in order to It is concise and will not be repeated here.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to receive a control frame, the control frame includes a public information field, the public information field includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the control frame is an initial control frame, EMLSR There is at least one link with full reception capability and at least one link with limited reception capability in the non-AP MLD; the processing unit 11 is configured to determine whether the received control frame is an initial control frame.
  • the control frame is a MU-RTS frame or a BSRP frame.
  • the communication device in the fifth design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned fifth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are to realize the corresponding operations of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the aforementioned fifth embodiment, for It is concise and will not be repeated here.
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to generate a third frame, where the third frame includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the available link or status of the non-AP MLD changes. link.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to send the third frame.
  • the communication device in the sixth design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned sixth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are to realize the corresponding operations of the non-AP MLD in the aforementioned sixth embodiment, for the sake of brevity , which will not be repeated here.
  • the communication device may be an AP MLD or a chip in the AP MLD, such as a Wi-Fi chip. That is, the communication device can be used to perform the steps or functions performed by the AP MLD in the method embodiments above.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to receive a first frame, the first frame includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is disabled for the AP MLD; the processing unit 11 uses Determining that the EMLSRnon-AP MLD is disabled according to the first indication information in the first frame.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is further configured to receive a second frame, where the second frame includes second indication information, and the second indication information is used to indicate that the EMLSR non-AP MLD is available.
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned first embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the aforementioned first embodiment. Let me repeat.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to receive a third frame, the third frame includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate that the link or state available in the EMLSR non-AP MLD has changed link; the processing unit 11 is configured to determine an available link in the EMLSRnon-AP MLD according to the third indication information and the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the third frame further includes third indication information, where the third indication information is used to indicate that a link with non-AP MLD has a state change.
  • the non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD supporting EMLSR mode.
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly implement the aforementioned second embodiment, and each unit in the communication device
  • the above-mentioned operations or functions are to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the foregoing embodiment 2, and for the sake of brevity, details are not repeated here.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is used to receive the first EML OMN frame, and the first EML OMN frame includes the EMLSR mode subfield and the EMLSR link bitmap, the EMLSR mode subfield is set to 1, and the first EML OMN frame is used to notify the updated EMLSR link; processing unit 11 is used to determine the EMLSR non- Links available in AP MLD.
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned third embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the aforementioned third embodiment. Let me repeat.
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to generate a control frame, the control frame includes a first user information field, and the first user information field includes an association identifier 12 subfield and indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate Whether the control frame received by the station indicated by the association identifier 12 subfield is an initial control frame; the transceiver unit 12 is configured to send the control frame.
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned fourth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the aforementioned fourth embodiment. Let me repeat.
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to generate a control frame, the control frame includes a public information field, the public information field includes indication information, and the indication information is used to indicate whether the control frame is an initial control frame; the transceiver unit 12, used to send the control frame.
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly execute the foregoing fifth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the foregoing fifth embodiment. Let me repeat.
  • the transceiver unit 12 is configured to receive a third frame, the third frame includes fourth indication information, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate the link available in the non-AP MLD or the link whose state changes
  • the third frame also includes third indication information
  • the third indication information is used to indicate whether a state change occurs on a link with non-AP MLD; specifically, the third indication information and the fourth indication information
  • the processing unit 11 is configured to determine available links in the non-AP MLD according to the fourth indication information in the third frame.
  • the processing unit 11 determines the non-AP MLD according to the third indication information and the fourth indication information carried in the third frame. - Links available in AP MLD;
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned sixth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the aforementioned sixth embodiment.
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned sixth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the aforementioned sixth embodiment.
  • the communication device in this design can correspondingly execute the aforementioned sixth embodiment, and the above-mentioned operations or functions of each unit in the communication device are respectively to realize the corresponding operations of the AP MLD in the aforementioned sixth embodiment.
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD of the embodiment of the present application have been introduced above, and the possible product forms of the AP MLD and non-AP MLD are introduced below. It should be understood that any form of product having the functions of the communication device in FIG. 18 above falls within the protection scope of the embodiment of the present application. It should also be understood that the following introduction is only an example, and the product forms of the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD of the embodiments of the present application are not limited thereto.
  • the AP MLD and non-AP MLD in the embodiment of the present application can be realized by a general bus architecture.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device 1000 provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the communication device 1000 may be an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD, or a chip therein.
  • FIG. 19 shows only the main components of the communication device 1000 .
  • the communication device may further include a memory 1003 and an input and output device (not shown in the figure).
  • the processor 1001 is mainly used to process communication protocols and communication data, control the entire communication device, execute software programs, and process data of the software programs.
  • the memory 1003 is mainly used to store software programs and data.
  • the transceiver 1002 may include a control circuit and an antenna, and the control circuit is mainly used for converting a baseband signal to a radio frequency signal and processing the radio frequency signal.
  • Antennas are mainly used to send and receive radio frequency signals in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • Input and output devices, such as touch screens, display screens, and keyboards, are mainly used to receive data input by users and output data to users.
  • the processor 1001 can read the software program in the memory 1003, interpret and execute the instructions of the software program, and process the data of the software program.
  • the processor 1001 performs baseband processing on the data to be sent, and then outputs the baseband signal to the radio frequency circuit, and the radio frequency circuit performs radio frequency processing on the baseband signal, and sends the radio frequency signal through the antenna in the form of electromagnetic waves.
  • the radio frequency circuit receives the radio frequency signal through the antenna, converts the radio frequency signal into a baseband signal, and outputs the baseband signal to the processor 1001, and the processor 1001 converts the baseband signal into data and processes the data deal with.
  • the radio frequency circuit and antenna may be set independently from the processor performing baseband processing.
  • the radio frequency circuit and antenna may be arranged remotely from the communication device.
  • the processor 1001, the transceiver 1002, and the memory 1003 may be connected through a communication bus.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the first embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S101 in FIG. 5, and/or to perform the technology described herein other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform steps S102 and S105 in FIG. 5, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the AP MLD in the first embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S104 in FIG. 5, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein ;
  • the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform steps S103 and S106 in FIG. 5, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the second embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S201 in FIG. 8, and/or to perform the technology described herein other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S202 in FIG. 8, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the AP MLD in the second embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S204 in FIG. 8, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein ;
  • the transceiver 1002 can be used to perform step S203 in FIG. 8, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the third embodiment above: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S301 in FIG. 13 , and/or to perform the technology described herein other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S302 in FIG. 13, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the AP MLD in the third embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S304 in FIG. 13, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein ;
  • the transceiver 1002 can be used to perform step S303 in FIG. 13, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the fourth embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S404 in FIG. 14, and/or to perform the technology described herein other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S403 in FIG. 14, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 may be used to perform the function of the AP MLD in Embodiment 4: the processor 1001 may be used to perform step S401 in FIG. 14 , and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein ;transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S402 in FIG. 14, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the fifth embodiment: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S504 in FIG. 16, and/or to perform the technology described herein other processes; the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S503 in FIG. 16, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the communication device 1000 can be used to perform the function of the AP MLD in the fifth embodiment above: the processor 1001 can be used to perform step S501 in FIG. 16, and/or to perform other processes of the technology described herein ;
  • the transceiver 1002 may be used to perform step S502 in FIG. 16, and/or other processes for the techniques described herein.
  • the processor 1001 may include a transceiver for implementing receiving and sending functions.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit, or an interface, or an interface circuit.
  • the transceiver circuits, interfaces or interface circuits for realizing the functions of receiving and sending can be separated or integrated together.
  • the above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit may be used for reading and writing code/data, or the above-mentioned transceiver circuit, interface or interface circuit may be used for signal transmission or transfer.
  • the processor 1001 may store instructions, and the instructions may be computer programs, and the computer programs run on the processor 1001 to enable the communication device 1000 to execute the methods described in any of the above method embodiments.
  • the computer program may be fixed in the processor 1001, and in this case, the processor 1001 may be implemented by hardware.
  • the communication device 1000 may include a circuit, and the circuit may implement the function of sending or receiving or communicating in the foregoing method embodiments.
  • the processors and transceivers described in this application can be implemented in integrated circuits (integrated circuits, ICs), analog ICs, radio frequency integrated circuits (radio frequency integrated circuits, RFICs), mixed-signal ICs, application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits) , ASIC), printed circuit board (printed circuit board, PCB), electronic equipment, etc.
  • the processor and transceiver can also be fabricated using various IC process technologies, such as complementary metal oxide semiconductor (CMOS), nMetal-oxide-semiconductor (NMOS), P-type Metal oxide semiconductor (positive channel metal oxide semiconductor, PMOS), bipolar junction transistor (bipolar junction transistor, BJT), bipolar CMOS (BiCMOS), silicon germanium (SiGe), gallium arsenide (GaAs), etc.
  • CMOS complementary metal oxide semiconductor
  • NMOS nMetal-oxide-semiconductor
  • PMOS P-type Metal oxide semiconductor
  • BJT bipolar junction transistor
  • BiCMOS bipolar CMOS
  • SiGe silicon germanium
  • GaAs gallium arsenide
  • a communication device may be a stand-alone device or may be part of a larger device.
  • the communication device may be:
  • a set of one or more ICs may also include storage components for storing data and computer programs;
  • ASIC such as modem (Modem);
  • the AP MLD and non-AP MLD in the embodiment of this application can be implemented by a general-purpose processor.
  • a general-purpose processor implementing non-AP MLD includes processing circuitry and input-output interfaces that communicate internally with the processing circuitry.
  • the general-purpose processor may be used to execute the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the first embodiment.
  • the processing circuit may be used to perform step S101 in FIG. 5, and/or other processes for performing the technology described herein;
  • the input-output interface may be used to perform step S102 and step S105 in FIG. 5, and/or or for the Other processes of technology.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the second embodiment above.
  • the processing circuit may be used to execute step S201 in FIG. 8, and/or be used to execute other processes of the technology described herein;
  • the input-output interface may be used to execute step S202 in FIG. 8, and/or to Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the third embodiment.
  • the processing circuit can be used to execute step S301 in FIG. 13 , and/or be used to execute other processes of the technology described herein;
  • the input-output interface can be used to execute step S302 in FIG. 13 , and/or to Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the fourth embodiment.
  • the processing circuit may be used to execute step S404 in FIG. 14, and/or be used to execute other processes of the technology described herein;
  • the input-output interface may be used to execute step S403 in FIG. 14, and/or to Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the EMLSR non-AP MLD in the fifth embodiment.
  • the processing circuit may be used to execute step S504 in FIG. 16, and/or be used to execute other processes of the techniques described herein;
  • the input-output interface may be used to execute step S503 in FIG. 16, and/or to Other procedures of the techniques described herein.
  • a general-purpose processor implementing the AP MLD includes processing circuitry and input-output interfaces that communicate internally with the processing circuitry.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the AP MLD in the first embodiment.
  • the processing circuit may be used to perform step S104 in FIG. 5, and/or other processes for performing the technology described herein;
  • the input-output interface may be used to perform step S103 and step S106 in FIG. 5, and/or Other procedures for the techniques described herein.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the AP MLD in the foregoing second embodiment.
  • the processing circuit can be used to perform step S204 in FIG. 8, and/or be used to perform other processes of the techniques described herein;
  • the input-output interface can be used to perform step S203 in FIG. 8, and/or be used in this paper Other procedures for the techniques described.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the AP MLD in the third embodiment.
  • the processing circuit can be used to execute step S304 in FIG. 13, and/or be used to execute other processes of the technology described herein;
  • the input-output interface can be used to execute step S303 in FIG. 13, and/or be used in this paper Other procedures for the techniques described.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the AP MLD in the fourth embodiment.
  • the processing circuit can be used to execute step S401 in FIG. 14, and/or be used to execute other processes of the techniques described herein;
  • the input-output interface can be used to execute step S402 in FIG. 14, and/or be used in this paper Other procedures for the techniques described.
  • the general-purpose processor can be used to execute the function of the AP MLD in the fifth embodiment.
  • the processing circuit can be used to execute step S501 in FIG. 16, and/or be used to execute other processes of the technology described herein;
  • the input-output interface can be used to execute step S502 in FIG. 16, and/or be used in this paper Other procedures for the techniques described.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a computer-readable storage medium, where computer program code is stored, and when the above-mentioned processor executes the computer program code, the electronic device executes the method in any one of the above-mentioned embodiments.
  • An embodiment of the present application further provides a computer program product, which, when the computer program product is run on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method in any one of the preceding embodiments.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication device, which can exist in the product form of a chip.
  • the structure of the device includes a processor and an interface circuit.
  • the processor is used to communicate with other devices through a receiving circuit, so that the device performs the aforementioned The method in any of the examples.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a wireless communication system, including AP MLD and non-AP MLD, and the AP MLD and non-AP MLD can execute the method in any of the foregoing embodiments.
  • the steps of the methods or algorithms described in connection with the disclosure of this application can be implemented in the form of hardware, or can be implemented in the form of a processor executing software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and software modules can be stored in random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), flash memory, erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable Programmable ROM, EPROM), electrically erasable Programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM), registers, hard disk, removable hard disk, CD-ROM, or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may also be a component of the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium can be located in the ASIC.
  • the ASIC may be located in the core network interface device.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist in the core network interface device as discrete components.
  • Computer-readable media includes both computer-readable storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one place to another.
  • a storage media may be any available media that can be accessed by a general purpose or special purpose computer.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请涉及无线通信领域，应用于支持802.11be或下一代标准的无线局域网中，尤其涉及一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，该方法包括：当EMLSR non-AP MLD发现自己的全部或部分链路的状态发生变化时，EMLSRnon-AP MLD在任意一条可用的链路上发送帧，该帧中携带指示信息，用于指示EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；还可以在该帧中携带另一指示信息，用于指示链路发生状态变化。采用本申请实施例，可以避免AP MLD在EMLSR non-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSR non-AP MLD发送信号，从而减少资源的浪费。

Description

EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置
本申请要求于2022年02月18日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210153355.9、申请名称为“EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权和2022年05月10日提交中国专利局、申请号为202210504981.8、申请名称为“EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种增强型多链路单无线电(enhanced multi-link single radio，EMLSR)模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置。
背景技术
无线局域网(wireless local area network，WLAN)或蜂窝网发展演进的持续技术目标是不断提高吞吐率。WLAN系统标准主要在电气和电子工程师协会(IEEE，institute of electrical and electronics engineers)标准组中进行讨论，在IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac/ax等标准中，吞吐率得到了持续提升。下一代Wi-Fi标准IEEE 802.11be被称为极高吞吐率(extremely high throughput，EHT)或Wi-Fi 7，其关键技术是通过多链路(multi-link，ML)通信来提升吞吐率。多链路通信的核心思想是：支持下一代IEEE 802.11标准的WLAN设备，即EHT设备拥有在多频段(multi-band)发送和接收的能力，从而使用更大的带宽进行数据传输，进而显著提升吞吐率。其中，多频段包括但不限于：2.4GHz Wi-Fi频段、5GHz Wi-Fi频段以及6GHz Wi-Fi频段。一个频段称为一条链路，多个频段称为多条链路。802.11be中将支持多链路通信的WLAN设备称为多链路设备(multi-link device，MLD)，显然，多链路设备可采用多条链路(或多个频段)并行通信使得传输的速率得到大幅度提升。多链路设备(MLD)包括一个或多个隶属的站点(affiliated STA)，隶属的站点是一个逻辑上的站点，可以工作在一条链路上。其中，隶属的站点可以为接入点(access point，AP)或非接入点站点(non-access point station，non-AP STA)。802.11be标准将隶属的站点为AP的多链路设备称为AP MLD，隶属的站点为non-AP STA的多链路设备称为non-AP MLD。
然而，因为某些情况下可能存在接收能力受限的站点(station，STA)，所以引入了一种增强型多链路单无线电(enhanced Multi-Link single radio，EMLSR)模式，主要应用于non-AP MLD。在EMLSR模式下，non-AP MLD在每条链路上以单无线电(singleradio)进行接收，即以1×1(1个输入1个输出)的方式对信道进行监听操作(listening operation)和接收AP MLD以正交频分复用(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing，OFDM)物理层协议数据单元(physical layer protocol data unit，PPDU)类型和非高吞吐率(high throughput，HT)重复(non-HT duplicate)PPDU类型发送的初始控制帧(initial control frame)，其他类型的帧目前不支持接收。而EMLSR模式下non-AP MLD的STA在EMLSR链路(EMLSR link)上收到AP MLD发送的初始控制帧后，将另一条链路上的空间流/接收天线临时切换到该EMLSR链路上，形成2×2(2个输入2个输出)的天线配置，以此进行接下来的数据传输。这里的监听操作被定义为空闲信道评估(clear channel assessment，CCA)。
因为EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD可能具有多个(指两个及两个以上)天线，每个天线对应该non-AP MLD中不同的STA并工作在不同的链路上。对于和EMLSR模式下的该 non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD而言，整个non-AP MLD或non-AP MLD的某些链路上的STA都可能因为某些原因(包括但不限于：不同设备或不同技术的共存(coexistence))出现不可用的情况。因此，当整个non-AP MLD或non-AP MLD的某些链路上的STA因为某些原因出现不可用的情况时，会影响正常通信。
发明内容
本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置，可以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD的链路的状态变化，避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，从而减少资源的浪费。
本申请提供一种具有NSTR能力的non-AP MLD的链路状态指示方法及相关装置，可以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的non-AP MLD的NSTR链路的状态变化，避免AP MLD在non-AP MLD的不可用NSTR链路上向non-AP MLD发送信号，从而减少资源的浪费。
下面从不同的方面介绍本申请，应理解的是，下面的不同方面的实施方式和有益效果可以互相参考。
本申请中，为便于描述，将“(工作在)EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD”记为“EMLSRnon-AP MLD”。或者说，EMLSRnon-AP MLD可用于表示non-AP MLD中的一条或多条链路(上的站点)进入EMLSR模式。同理，可以将“EMLSRnon-AP MLD中进入EMLSR模式的站点”记为“EMLSR STA”。
本申请中，为便与描述，将“non-AP MLD中存在NSTR能力的某些链路对(link pair)中的链路”记为NSTR链路。
以下内容以EMLSR模式下链路状态指示为例进行说明，其他模式下的链路状态指示方法与此类似。
第一方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，该方法包括：当EMLSR non-AP MLD发现自己所有链路(或所有链路上的STA)即将对于其关联的AP MLD而言不可用时，EMLSRnon-AP MLD生成第一帧，并在任意一条可用的链路上发送该第一帧。该第一帧中可以包括第一指示信息，用于指示EMLSRnon-AP MLD(的所有链路)针对AP MLD禁用(disabled)。其中，第一帧可以为数据帧。
应理解。本申请中提及的“禁用”、“不可用”等均是针对AP MLD来说的。举例来说，“EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用”是指对于和EMLSRnon-AP MLD关联的AP MLD而言，EMLSRnon-AP MLD不可使用；或者说，对于该AP MLD而言，其无法与该EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行通信；又或者说，对于该AP MLD而言，EMLSRnon-AP MLD不接收或者不回复上行触发帧。但是该EMLSRnon-AP MLD本身是可以与其它non-AP MLD或单链路STA进行通信，也就是说，对于其它non-AP MLD或单链路STA而言，该EMLSRnon-AP MLD仍然是可用的。
还应理解，当EMLSR non-AP MLD发送完该第一帧后，或者发送完该第一帧的一段时间后，对于其关联的AP MLD而言EMLSR non-AP MLD(的所有链路)才不可用。
因为EMLSRnon-AP MLD因为某些原因而暂时不可用时，与EMLSRnon-AP MLD关联的AP MLD无法与EMLSRnon-AP MLD通信。但是AP MLD并不知道当前与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD是否出现了不可用的情况，那么当AP MLD想要与EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行通信时，就会向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，比如初始控制帧。又因为EMLSRnon-AP  MLD的链路资源被占用或者说天线资源被占用，无法正确接收AP MLD发送的初始控制帧，也就无法响应该初始控制帧。所以AP MLD无法收到初始控制帧的响应，可能会重复发送初始控制帧。而AP MLD每次发送初始控制帧之前，都会进行信道竞争，以获得信道资源来发送初始控制帧；从而导致资源的浪费。
因此，本申请在EMLSRnon-AP MLD因为某些原因而暂时不可用时，通过在数据帧中携带第一指示信息来上报自己出现了不可用的情况，以使AP MLD及时获知与EMLSRnon-AP MLD的链路的状态变化，避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，例如发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一帧中还包括上行多用户禁用子字段和/或上行多用户数据禁用子字段。
可选的，该上行多用户禁用子字段和所述上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，在EMLSR non-AP MLD通知与其关联的AP MLD自己进入不可用状态后，如果EMLSR non-AP MLD发现自己的链路恢复可用，EMLSR non-AP MLD可以在恢复可用的链路上向该AP MLD发送第二帧。也就是说，EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送该第一帧之后，该方法还包括：EMLSR non-AP MLD发送第二帧。其中，该第二帧中可以包括第二指示信息，用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)可用(enabled)，或者说指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)恢复(resume)，或者指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)切换回监听操作(switch back to listening operation)。其中，第二帧可以为数据帧。
可选的，该第二指示信息可以携带于EHT OM控制子字段中。该二帧中还可以包括OM控制子字段，该OM控制子字段中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和所述上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用，该第一链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD发送该第二帧的链路。
可选的，该第二指示信息可以携带于EHT OM控制子字段中。该二帧中还可以包括OM控制子字段，该OM控制子字段中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和所述上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为0；其中，设置为0的上行多用户禁用子字段、设置为0的上行多用户数据禁用子字段、以及该第二指示信息用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用。
本申请在整个EMLSR non-AP MLD或其一条链路上的EMLSR STA结束不可用，准备恢复到监听模式(listening mode)时，通过第二指示信息告知AP MLD；以使AP MLD及时获知EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路，便于AP MLD调度EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行上行传输或向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送下行数据等。
结合第一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称，即EMLSR non-AP MLD的每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线为常规天线，其它天线为受限天线；常规天线所在的链路称为接收能力完全链路(RX full capability link)，而受限天线所在链路称为接收能力受限链路(RX limitation link)。或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路。当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收多用户请求发送(multi-user request to send，MU-RTS)帧或缓存状态报告轮询(buffer status report poll，BSRP)帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个 站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
本申请在EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称时，通过在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，来指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者对于某个站点而言接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否是初始控制帧；以使EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路上的EMLSR STA可以分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，从而确定自己接下来的行为。
第二方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，该方法包括：AP MLD接收第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的所有链路)禁用(disabled)；AP MLD根据该第一帧中的该第一指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用。其中，第一帧可以为数据帧。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一指示信息可以携带于EHT OM control子字段中。EHT OM Control子字段为OM Control子字段在EHT背景下的扩展。上述第一帧中还可以包括OM控制子字段，该OM控制子字段中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和/或上行多用户数据禁用子字段。应理解，如果第一帧中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和/或上行多用户数据禁用子字段，当AP MLD读到第一指示信息时，可以忽略该第一帧中上行多用户禁用子字段和/或上行多用户数据禁用子字段设置的值。
可选的，该上行多用户禁用子字段和所述上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，AP MLD接收第一帧之后，该方法还包括：AP MLD接收第二帧，该第二帧中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)可用，或者说指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)恢复(resume)，或者指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)切换回监听操作(switch back to listening operation)。其中，第二帧可以为数据帧。
可选的，该第二指示信息可以携带于EHT OM控制子字段中。该二帧中还可以包括OM控制子字段，该OM控制子字段中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和所述上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用，该第一链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD发送该第二帧的链路。
可选的，该第二指示信息可以携带于EHT OM控制子字段中。该二帧中还可以包括OM控制子字段，该OM控制子字段中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和所述上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为0；其中，设置为0的上行多用户禁用子字段、设置为0的上行多用户数据禁用子字段、以及该第二指示信息用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用。
结合第二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，AP MLD可以在发送给EMLSR non-AP MLD的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第三方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是non-AP MLD或non-AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：处理单元，用于生成第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；收发单元，用于发送该第一帧。其中，第一帧为数据帧。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一指示信息可以携带于EHT OM control 子字段中。EHT OM Control子字段为OM Control子字段在EHT背景下的扩展。上述第一帧中还可以包括OM控制子字段，该OM控制子字段中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和/或上行多用户数据禁用子字段。
可选的，该上行多用户禁用子字段和该上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于发送第二帧，该第二帧中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示该EMLSR non-AP MLD可用。其中，第二帧为数据帧。
可选的，上述第二帧中还包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和该上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用，该第一链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD发送该第二帧的链路。
可选的，上述第二帧中还包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和该上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为0；设置为0的该上行多用户禁用子字段、设置为0的该上行多用户数据禁用子字段、以及该第二指示信息用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用。
结合第三方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，接收MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第四方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是AP MLD或AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：收发单元，用于接收第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；处理单元，用于根据该第一帧中的该第一指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第一指示信息可以携带于EHT OM control子字段中。EHT OM Control子字段为OM Control子字段在EHT背景下的扩展。上述第一帧中还可以包括OM控制子字段，该OM控制子字段中包括上行多用户禁用子字段和/或上行多用户数据禁用子字段。
可选的，该上行多用户禁用子字段和该上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于接收第二帧，该第二帧中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)可用。其中，第二帧可以为数据帧。
可选的，上述第二帧中还包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和该上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为1。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用，该第一链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD发送该第二帧的链路。
可选的，上述第二帧中还包括上行多用户禁用子字段和上行多用户数据禁用子字段，该上行多用户禁用子字段和该上行多用户数据禁用子字段均设置为0；设置为0的该上行多用户禁用子字段、设置为0的该上行多用户数据禁用子字段、以及该第二指示信息用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路可用。
结合第四方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带 指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第五方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，该方法包括：当EMLSR non-AP MLD发现自己的全部或部分链路的状态发生变化时，比如：对于和EMLSR non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD而言，EMLSR non-AP MLD中的至少一条链路(上的站点)不可使用或从不可用恢复到listening mode；EMLSR non-AP MLD生成第三帧并在任意一条可用的链路上发送该第三帧。其中，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。
本申请在EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA因为某些原因暂时不可用的情况下，主动上报发生变化的链路或可用的链路，以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路或发生变化的链路，从而避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，例如发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。
结合第五方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称，即EMLSR non-AP MLD的每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线为常规天线，其它天线为受限天线。或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路。当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第六方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，该方法包括：AP MLD接收第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；AP MLD根据该第三帧中的第四指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路。
结合第六方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，AP MLD在发送给EMLSR non-AP MLD的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第七方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是non-AP MLD或non-AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：处理单元，用于生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；收发单元，用于发送该第三帧。
结合第七方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，接收MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第八方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是AP MLD或AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：收发单元，用于接收第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示该EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；处理单元，用于根据该第三帧中的该第四指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路。
结合第八方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化。该non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括但不限于：EMLSR链路禁用，和EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，当non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化为EMLSR链路禁用时，上述第三指示信息具体用于指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，或者用于指示一个或多个EMLSR链路不再是EMLSR链路的成员且不会被non-AP MLD用于EMLSR模式。相应的上述第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中禁用的EMLSR链路。
本申请在EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA因为某些原因暂时不可用使，向AP MLD上报自己链路的状态变化，和发生变化的链路；以使AP MLD及时获知EMLSR non-AP MLD中哪些链路可用和/或哪些链路不可用，避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，例如发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，当non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化为EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路时，上述第三指示信息具体用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为(或恢复为)可用的EMLSR链路，或者用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路切换回监听操作，或者用于指示一个或多个EMLSR链路将被non-AP MLD用于EMLSR模式并成为EMLSR链路的成员，或者切换回监听。相应的上述第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中从不可用变为可用的EMLSR链路。
本申请在EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA结束不可用准备恢复到监听模式(listening mode)时，也上报向AP MLD上报自己链路的状态变化，和发生变化的链路；以使AP MLD及时获知EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路，便于AP MLD调度EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行上行传输或向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送下行数据等。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述第三指示信息通过2个子字段来表示，其中一个字段用于指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，另一个子字段用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。换句话说，上述第三指示信息具体用于指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，且EMLSR non-AP MLD中不存在不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。或者，上述第三指示信息具体用于指示不存在EMLSR链路禁用，且EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述第三指示信息和上述第四指示信息可以位于第三帧的高吞吐率(highthoughout，HT)控制字段的AP援助请求(AP assistance request，AAR)控制子字段中。
本申请利用现有的AAR控制子字段来携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息，无需设计新的 帧格式和流程，可以减少信令开销。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述第三指示信息和上述第四指示信息可以位于第三帧的聚合控制(Aggregated-control，A-control)子字段中。
本申请通过新设计一种A-Control子字段来携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息，其含义清晰，并且传统站点不会发生误读(因为传统站点读不懂新设计的A-Control子字段)。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述第三帧为EML操作模式通知(operating mode notification，OMN)帧。上述第三指示信息和上述第四指示信息可以位于第三帧的EML控制字段中，该EML控制字段中包括的EMLSR模式子字段设置为1。
可选的，上述EML控制字段中还可以包括以下一项或多项信息：禁用的开始时间，可用的开始时间，禁用的结束时间，禁用的持续时间，EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路的收发能力。
本申请利用EML OMN帧(即上述第三帧)的EML控制字段来携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息，因为EML控制字段可扩展，所以还可以同时携带一些可选信息；其实现更灵活，可携带的信息更丰富。
上述第五至第八方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述第四指示信息为比特位图，该第四指示信息的一个比特对应一条链路。当该第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第一值时，用于指示该比特对应的链路是可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；当该第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第二值时，用于指示该比特对应的链路是不可用的链路或状态未发生变化的链路。其中，第一值为，第二值为0；或者第一值为0，第二值为1。
本申请通过比特位图，不仅能指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路，也能指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路或状态未发生变化的链路；也就是说，本申请通过比特位图可以指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中每条链路的情况，即可用或不可用；以使AP MLD可以从中确定出EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
第九方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，该方法包括：当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，EMLSR non-AP MLD生成第一EML OMN帧，并向AP MLD发送该第一EML OMN帧。其中，第一EML OMN帧可以包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路。应理解，EMLSR链路比特位图的含义可参考现有标准的描述，此处不再赘述。还应理解，该第一EML OMN帧的帧格式可以参考现有标准中EML OMN帧的描述，此处不赘述。换句话说，本申请增加了EML OMN帧的功能，未改变EML OMN帧的帧格式。
本申请无需新增字段(或子字段)来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中链路状态的变化，而是通过增加EML OMN帧的功能和具体的规则来实现链路状态变化的通知；能够使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD当前可用的链路，从而避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，例如发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。
结合第九方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称，即EMLSR non-AP MLD的每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线为常规天线，其它天线为受限天线。或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路。当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收 MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第十方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，该方法包括：当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，AP MLD接收第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；AP MLD再根据该第一EML OMN帧，确定EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
结合第十方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，AP MLD在发送给EMLSR non-AP MLD的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第十一方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是non-AP MLD或non-AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：处理单元，用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，生成第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；收发单元，用于向AP MLD发送该第一EML OMN帧。
结合第十一方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，接收MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第十二方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是AP MLD或AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：收发单元，用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，接收第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；处理单元，用于根据该第一EML OMN帧，确定EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
结合第十二方面，在一种可能的实现方式中，上述收发单元，还用于当EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路可用时，发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
上述第九至第十二方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述第一EML OMN帧中还包括以下一项或多项信息：EMLSR链路更新的开始时间，EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路的收发能力。
第十三方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法，该方法包括：EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路；EMLSR non-AP MLD接收MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧；EMLSR non-AP MLD确定接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
应理解，EMLSR non-AP MLD可能存在天线能力配置不对称的链路，即每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线具有较强的接收能力，可接收所有类型的PPDU；另一条天线则是较弱的接收能力，只能接收部分类型的PPDU。因为AP可以与天线接收能力较强的EMLSR STA正常通信，而不需要借助其它链路上的天线；那么AP给天线接收能力较强的EMLSR STA发送下行数据前可以不用发送初始控制帧。所以当该EMLSR STA收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧时，该EMLSR STA无法确认收到的帧是否为初始控制帧，也就是说，EMLSR non-AP MLD无法确定是否需要将其它链路上的天线/空间流临时切换到该EMLSR STA工作的链路上。
故而，本申请在EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称的情况下，通过在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中增加指示信息，来指示这个MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否是初始控制帧；以使EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路上的EMLSR STA可以分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，从而确定自己接收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧后的行为。
第十四方面，本申请提供一种EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法，该方法包括：AP MLD生成并发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
可选的，AP MLD可以在接收能力完全链路上发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，也可以在接收能力受限链路上发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。因为接收能力受限链路上的EMLSR STA只能接收初始控制帧，所以接收能力受限链路上发送的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中的指示信息，指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧为初始控制帧。
第十五方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是non-AP MLD或non-AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：收发单元，用于接收MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧；处理单元，用于确定接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
第十六方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置可以是AP MLD或AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片。该通信装置包括：处理单元，用于生成MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧；收发单元，用于发送该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。
上述第十三至第十六方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述指示信息位于上述MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的公共信息字段中。
本申请在公共信息字段中携带上述指示信息，可以解决在天线配置不对称的EMLSR模式下接收能力完全链路上的STA无法分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧的问题。
上述第十三至第十六方面中任一方面的一种可能实现方式中，上述指示信息控制帧的第一用户信息字段中，该第一用户信息字段中包括关联标识符12子字段；该指示信息具体用于指示该关联标识符12子字段所指示的站点接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
可选的，上述控制帧包括一个或多个用户信息字段，该第一用户信息字段为该一个或多个用户信息字段中EMLSR站点对应的用户信息字段。EMLSR站点是EMLSR non-AP MLD中进入EMLSR模式的站点。
本申请在用户信息字段中携带指示信息，不仅可以解决EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路上的EMLSR STA无法分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧的问题；还可以针对不同站点指示不同的信息，实现更灵活。比如，在用户信息字段中携带指示信息 可以实现同一个MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧对于一部分EMLSR STA而言为初始控制帧，而对另一部分EMLSR STA而言为普通控制帧。
第十七方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，具体为non-AP MLD，包括处理器和收发器。该收发器用于收发帧，该处理器用于执行程序指令，以使得该通信装置执行本申请实施例提供的方法。可选的，该通信装置还包括存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序包括程序指令。
一种设计中，处理器用于生成第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示该EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；收发器用于发送该第一帧。
一种设计中，处理器用于生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；收发器用于发送该第三帧。可选的，该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。
一种设计中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，处理器用于生成第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；收发器用于向AP MLD发送该第一EML OMN帧。
一种设计中，收发器用于接收控制帧，该控制帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该控制帧是否为初始控制帧，EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路；处理器用于确定接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。
第十八方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，具体为AP MLD，包括处理器和收发器。该收发器用于收发帧，该处理器用于执行程序指令，以使得该通信装置执行本申请实施例提供的方法。可选的，该通信装置还包括存储器，该存储器用于存储计算机程序，该计算机程序包括程序指令。
一种设计中，收发器用于接收第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；处理器用于根据该第一帧中的该第一指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用。
一种设计中，收发器用于接收第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；处理器用于根据该第三帧中的该第四指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路。可选的，该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。
一种设计中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，收发器用于接收第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；处理器用于根据该第一EML OMN帧，确定该EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
一种设计中，处理器用于生成控制帧，该控制帧中包括第一用户信息字段，该控制帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该控制帧是否为初始控制帧；收发器用于发送该控制帧。
第十九方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置以芯片的产品形态实现，包括输入输出接口和处理电路。该通信装置为non-AP MLD中的芯片。
一种设计中，处理电路，用于生成第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；输入输出接口，用于输出该第一帧并通过射频电路进行处理后，经过天线发送该第一帧。
一种设计中，处理电路，用于生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；输入输出接口输出该第三帧并通过射频电路进行处理后，经过天线发送该第三帧。可选的，该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。
一种设计中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，处理电路，用于生成第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；输入输出接口输出该第一EML OMN帧并通过射频电路进行处理后，经过天线发送该第一EML OMN帧。
一种设计中，输入输出接口，用于输入通过天线和射频电路接收的控制帧，该控制帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该控制帧是否为初始控制帧，EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路；处理电路，用于确定接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。
第二十方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，该通信装置以芯片的产品形态实现，包括输入输出接口和处理电路。该通信装置为AP MLD中的芯片。
一种设计中，输入输出接口，用于输入通过天线和射频电路接收的第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；处理电路，用于根据该第一帧中的该第一指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用。
一种设计中，输入输出接口，用于输入通过天线和射频电路接收的第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；处理电路，用于根据该第三帧中的该第四指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路。可选的，该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。
一种设计中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，输入输出接口，用于输入通过天线和射频电路接收的第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；处理电路，用于根据该第一EML OMN帧，确定该EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
一种设计中，处理电路，用于生成控制帧，该控制帧中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该控制帧是否为初始控制帧；输入输出接口，用于输出该控制帧并通过射频电路进行处理后，经过天线发送该控制帧。
第二十一方面，本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有程序指令，当该程序指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面、或上述第二方 面、或上述第五方面、或上述第六方面、或上述第九方面、或上述第十方面所述的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法。
第二十二方面，本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有程序指令，当该程序指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第十三方面、或上述第十四方面所述的EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法。
第二十三方面，本申请提供一种包含程序指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第一方面、或上述第二方面、或上述第五方面、或上述第六方面、或上述第九方面、或上述第十方面所述的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法。
第二十四方面，本申请提供一种包含程序指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第十三方面、或上述第十四方面所述的EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法。
实施本申请实施例，一方面可以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD的链路的状态变化，避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，从而减少资源的浪费，另一方面可以解决在天线配置不对称的EMLSR模式下接收能力完全链路上的STA无法分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧的问题。
第二十五方面，本申请提供一种链路状态指示方法，具体为NSTR link pair中的链路状态指示方法，包括但不限于以下步骤：
non-AP MLD生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。
non-AP MLD发送该第三帧。
第二十六方面，本申请提供一种链路状态指示方法，具体为NSTR link pair中的链路状态指示方法，包括但不限于以下步骤：
AP MLD接收第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。
可选的，若该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路是否发生状态变化；具体的，第三指示信息和第四指示信息的实现方式参考前文的描述，此处不再赘述。
所述AP MLD根据该第三帧中的第四指示信息，确定non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
可选的，与non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD接收到上述第三帧后，根据该第三帧中携带的第三指示信息和第四指示信息，确定non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
第二十七方面，本申请提供一种通信装置，所述通信装置用于实现第二十五方面、或上述第二十六方面所述的链路状态指示方法。
第二十八方面，本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有程序指令，当该程序指令在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十五方面、或上述第二十六方面所述的链路状态指示方法。
第二十九方面，本申请提供一种包含程序指令的计算机程序产品，当其在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行上述第二十五方面、或上述第二十六方面所述的链路状态指示方法。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图 作简单地介绍。
图1是本申请实施例提供的无线通信系统的一架构示意图；
图2a是本申请实施例提供的多链路设备的一结构示意图；
图2b是本申请实施例提供的多链路设备的另一结构示意图；
图3是本申请实施例提供的多链路通信的一示意图；
图4是EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD与AP MLD通信的示意图；
图5是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法的第一种示意流程图；
图6是本申请实施例提供的OM控制子字段的帧格式示意图；
图7a是本申请实施例提供的HT Control字段中OM Control子字段和EHT OM control子字段的一帧格式示意图；
图7b是本申请实施例提供的HT Control字段中OM Control子字段和EHT OM control子字段的另一帧格式示意图；
图8是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法的第二种示意流程图；
图9a是本申请实施例提供的AAR控制子字段的一帧格式示意图；
图9b是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的一帧格式示意图；
图9c是本申请实施例提供的EML控制字段的一帧格式示意图；
图10a是本申请实施例提供的AAR控制子字段的另一帧格式示意图；
图10b是本申请实施例提供的AAR控制子字段的又一帧格式示意图；
图11a是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的另一帧格式示意图；
图11b是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的又一帧格式示意图；
图12a是本申请实施例提供的EML控制字段的另一帧格式示意图；
图12b是本申请实施例提供的EML控制字段的又一帧格式示意图；
图13是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法的第三种示意流程图；
图14是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法的一示意流程图；
图15是本申请实施例提供的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中用户信息字段的帧格式示意图；
图16是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法的另一示意流程图；
图17是本申请实施例提供的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中公共信息字段的帧格式示意图；
图18是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图；
图19是本申请实施例提供的通信装置1000的结构示意图；
图20是本申请实施例提供的NSTR link pair中的链路状态指示方法的一示意流程图；
图21a是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的一帧格式示意图；
图21b是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的另一帧格式示意图。
具体实施方式
下面将结合本申请实施例中的附图，对本申请实施例中的技术方案进行清楚、完整地描述。
在本申请的描述中，除非另有说明，“/”表示“或”的意思，例如，A/B可以表示A或B。本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。此外，“至少一个”是指一个或多个，“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达，是指的这些项中的任意组合，包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如，a，b， 或c中的至少一项(个)，可以表示：a，b，c；a和b；a和c；b和c；或a和b和c。其中a，b，c可以是单个，也可以是多个。
在本申请的描述中，“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定，并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。
本申请中，“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”、“举例来说”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言，使用“示例性的”、“举例来说”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。
应理解，在本申请中，“当…时”、“若”以及“如果”均指在某种客观情况下装置会做出相应的处理，并非是限定时间，且也不要求装置实现时一定要有判断的动作，也不意味着存在其它限定。
本申请中对于使用单数表示的元素旨在用于表示“一个或多个”，而并非表示“一个且仅一个”，除非有特别说明。
应理解，在本申请各实施例中，“与A对应的B”表示B与A相关联，根据A可以确定B。但还应理解，根据A确定B并不意味着仅仅根据A确定B，还可以根据A和/或其它信息确定B。
为便于理解本申请实施例提供的方法，下面将对本申请实施例提供的方法的系统架构进行说明。可理解的，本申请实施例描述的系统架构是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案，并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定。
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于无线通信系统中，比如无线局域网系统中，本申请提供的技术方案可以由无线通信系统中的通信设备或通信设备中的芯片或处理器实现。该通信设备可以是一种支持多条链路并行传输的无线通信设备，例如，该通信设备可以称为多链路设备(multi-link device，MLD)或多频段设备。相比于仅支持单条链路传输的通信设备来说，多链路设备具有更高的传输效率和更大的吞吐率。
多链路设备包括一个或多个隶属的站点(affiliated STA)，隶属的站点是一个逻辑上的站点，可以工作在一条链路或一个频段或一个信道上。其中，隶属的站点可以为接入点(access point，AP)或非接入点站点(non-access point station，non-AP STA)。802.11be将隶属的站点为AP的多链路设备称为AP多链路设备(AP multi-link device，AP MLD)，隶属的站点为non-AP STA的多链路设备称为non-AP多链路设备(non-AP multi-link device，non-AP MLD)。
可选的，一个多链路设备可包括多个逻辑站点，每个逻辑站点工作在一条链路上，但允许多个逻辑站点工作在同一条链路上。AP MLD与non-AP MLD在数据传输时，可以采用链路标识来标识一条链路或一条链路上的站点。在通信之前，AP MLD与non-AP MLD可以先协商或沟通链路标识与一条链路或一条链路上的站点的对应关系。因此在数据传输的过程中，不需要传输大量的信令信息用来指示链路或链路上的站点，携带链路标识即可，降低了信令开销，提升了传输效率。
一个示例中，AP MLD在建立基本服务集(basic service set，BSS)时发送的管理帧，比如信标(beacon)帧、关联请求帧等，会携带一个元素，该元素包括多个链路标识信息字段。一个链路标识信息字段可以指示一个链路标识与工作在该链路标识对应的链路上的站点的对应关系。一个链路标识信息字段不仅包括链路标识，还包括以下一个或多个信息：介质接入控制(medium access control，MAC)地址，操作集，信道号。其中，MAC地址，操作集， 信道号中的一个或多个可以指示一条链路。对于AP来说，AP的MAC地址也就是AP的BSSID(basic service set identifier，基本服务集标识)。另一个示例中，在多链路设备关联过程中，AP MLD和non-AP MLD协商多个链路标识信息字段。其中，多链路关联是指AP MLD的一个AP与non-AP MLD的一个STA进行一次关联，该关联可帮助non-AP MLD的多个STA与AP MLD的多个AP分别关联，其中，一个STA关联到一个AP。non-AP MLD中的一个或多个STA可以与AP MLD中的一个或多个AP之间建立关联关系之后进行通信。
可选的，多链路设备可以遵循IEEE 802.11系列协议实现无线通信，例如，遵循极高吞吐率的站点，或遵循基于IEEE 802.11be或兼容支持IEEE 802.11be的站点，实现与其他设备的通信。当然，其他设备可以是多链路设备，也可以不是多链路设备。
本申请提供的技术方案可以应用于一个节点与一个或多个节点进行通信的场景中；也可以应用于单用户的上/下行通信场景中，多用户的上/下行通信场景中；还可以应用于设备到设备(device to device，D2D)的通信场景中。在本申请实施例中，术语“通信”还可以描述为“数据传输”、“信息传输”或“传输”。术语“传输”可以泛指发送和接收。
其中，上述任一节点可以是AP MLD，也可以是non-AP MLD。例如，本申请提供的技术方案应用于AP MLD与non-AP MLD之间进行通信的场景。可选的，上述节点中也可以有一个或多个节点是支持仅在单链路上进行传输的遗留站点，也就是说，上述通信场景中除了多链路设备外也可以包括单链路设备，如单链路STA。
参见图1，图1是本申请实施例提供的无线通信系统的一架构示意图。如图1所示，该无线通信系统包括至少一个AP MLD(如图1中的AP MLD100)和至少一个non-AP MLD(如图1中的non-AP MLD200和non-AP MLD300)。可选的，图1中还包括支持仅在单链路上进行传输的遗留站点(如图1中的单链路non-AP STA400，又称为STA400)。其中，AP MLD是为non-AP MLD提供服务的多链路设备，non-AP MLD可以与AP MLD之间采用多条链路进行通信，从而达到提升吞吐率的效果。AP MLD中的一个AP可以与non-AP MLD中的一个STA通过一条链路进行通信。当然，AP MLD(中的一个AP)也可以为遗留站点提供服务；non-AP MLD(中的一个STA)也可以与遗留站点进行点对点(peer-to-peer，P2P)通信。可理解的，图1中AP MLD、non-AP MLD以及遗留站点(即单链路non-AP STA)的个数，仅是示例性的。
参见图2a，图2a是本申请实施例提供的多链路设备的一结构示意图。802.11标准关注多链路设备中的802.11物理层(physical layer，PHY)和介质接入控制(medium access control，MAC)层部分。如图2a所示，多链路设备包括的多个STA在低MAC(low MAC)层和PHY层互相独立，在高MAC(high MAC)层也互相独立。参见图2b，图2b是本申请实施例提供的多链路设备的另一结构示意图。如图2b所示，多链路设备中包括的多个STA在低MAC(low MAC)层和PHY层互相独立，共用高MAC(high MAC)层。当然，在多链路通信过程中，Non-APMLD可以是采用高MAC层相互独立的结构，而APMLD采用高MAC层共用的结构；也可以是Non-AP MLD采用高MAC层共用的结构，AP MLD采用高MAC层相互独立的结构；还可以是Non-AP MLD和AP MLD都采用高MAC层共用的结构；还可以是Non-AP MLD和AP MLD都采用高MAC层相互独立的结构。本申请实施例对于多链路设备的内部结构示意图并不进行限定，图2a和图2b仅是示例性说明。示例性的，该高MAC层或低MAC层都可以由多链路设备的芯片系统中的一个处理器实现，还可以分别由一个芯片系统中的不同处理模块实现。
示例性的，本申请实施例中的多链路设备可以是单个天线的设备，也可以是多天线的设备。例如，可以是两个以上天线的设备。本申请实施例对于多链路设备包括的天线数目不做限定。
参见图3，图3是本申请实施例提供的多链路通信的一示意图。如图3所示，AP MLD包括n个站点，分别是AP1,AP2,…,APn；non-AP MLD也包括n个站点，分别是STA1,STA2,…,STAn。AP MLD和non-AP MLD可以采用链路1,链路2,…,链路n并行进行通信。其中，AP MLD中的一个AP可以与non-AP MLD中的一个STA建立关联关系。比如，non-AP MLD中的STA1与AP MLD中的AP1建立关联关系，non-AP MLD中的STA2与AP MLD中的AP2建立关联关系，non-AP MLD中的STAn与AP MLD中的APn建立关联关系等。
示例性的，多链路设备(这里既可以是non-AP MLD，也可以是AP MLD)为具有无线通信功能的装置，该装置可以为一个整机的设备，还可以是安装在整机设备中的芯片或处理系统等，安装这些芯片或处理系统的设备可以在这些芯片或处理系统的控制下，实现本申请实施例的方法和功能。例如，本申请实施例中的non-APMLD具有无线收发功能，可以支持802.11系列协议，可以与APMLD或其他non-APMLD进行通信。例如，non-APMLD是允许用户与AP通信进而与WLAN通信的任何用户通信设备。例如，non-APMLD可以为平板电脑、桌面型、膝上型、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer，UMPC)、手持计算机、上网本、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant，PDA)、手机等可以联网的用户设备，或物联网中的物联网节点，或车联网中的车载通信装置等；non-APMLD还可以为上述这些终端中的芯片和处理系统。本申请实施例中的APMLD可以为non-APMLD提供服务的装置，可以支持802.11系列协议。例如，APMLD可以为通信服务器、路由器、交换机、网桥等通信实体，或，APMLD可以包括各种形式的宏基站，微基站，中继站等，当然APMLD还可以为这些各种形式的设备中的芯片和处理系统，从而实现本申请实施例的方法和功能。
可理解的，多链路设备可以支持高速率低时延的传输，随着无线局域网应用场景的不断演进，多链路设备还可以应用于更多场景中，比如为智慧城市中的传感器节点(比如，智能水表，智能电表，智能空气检测节点)，智慧家居中的智能设备(比如智能摄像头，投影仪，显示屏，电视机，音响，电冰箱，洗衣机等)，物联网中的节点，娱乐终端(比如AR，VR等可穿戴设备)，智能办公中智能设备(比如，打印机，投影仪等)，车联网中的车联网设备，日常生活场景中的一些基础设施(比如自动售货机，商超的自助导航台，自助收银设备，自助点餐机等)。本申请实施例中对于Non-APMLD和APMLD的具体形式不做限定，在此仅是示例性说明。其中，802.11协议可以为支持802.11be或兼容802.11be的协议。
上述内容简要介绍了本申请实施例的系统结构，为更好地理解本申请的技术方案，下面简要介绍几个与本申请相关的内容。
一、空间流(spatial stream)和天线
无线电在同一时间发送多个信号，每一个信号称为一个空间流。在多输入多输出(multiple input multiple output，MIMO)系统中，空间流数一般小于或等于天线的数目。如果收发两端的天线数量不相等，则空间流数小于或等于收发两端最小的天线数目。例如，4×4(4根发射天线4根接收天线，又称为4个输入4个输出)的MIMO系统可以用于传送4个或者更少的空间流，而3×2(3根发射天线2根接收天线)的MIMO系统可以传送2个或者小于2个的 空间流。
可选的，本申请可沿用MIMO系统中天线与空间流的关系。
二、EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD与AP MLD进行通信的过程
参见图4，图4是EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD与AP MLD通信的示意图。其中，EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在每条链路上以一根天线(或单无线电singleradio)进行接收，即EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在每条链路上采用一根天线对信道进行监听操作(即CCA)。此外，EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD在每条链路上以一根天线只能接收AP MLD以OFDM PPDU类型和non-HT duplicate PPDU类型发送的初始控制帧，其他类型的帧不支持接收。应理解，当发送端在某条链路上采用一根天线发送，接收端在该条链路上也采用一根天线接收时，该链路上形成1×1(1个输入1个输出)天线配置。当发送端在某条链路上采用两根天线发送，接收端在该条链路上也采用两根天线接收时，该链路上形成2×2(2个输入2个输出)天线配置。如图4所示，AP在信道2(channel 2，简称ch2)上采用一根天线发送初始控制帧，如多用户(multi-user，MU)请求发送(request to send，RTS)帧，该初始控制帧中包括信道转换信号(channel switch signal)，该信道转换信号用于指示STA切换接收使用的天线。STA在信道2上采用一根天线接收AP发送的初始控制帧(此时信道2上形成1×1天线配置)，在信道2上回复允许发送(clear to send，CTS)帧，并根据该初始控制帧中信道转换信号的指示，将信道1(channel 1，简称ch1)上的接收天线(radio)临时切换到信道2上形成2×2天线配置，然后采用2×2天线配置在信道2上进行下行的数据传输。
其中，初始控制帧是OFDM PPDU或non-HT duplicate PPDU格式，且速率满足6Mbps，12Mbps，或24Mbps之一。初始控制帧为多用户(multi-user，MU)请求发送(MU-RTS)帧或缓存状态报告轮询(buffer status report poll，BSRP)帧。而工作在EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD支持MU-RTS帧和BSRP帧的接收，并且当EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD回复初始控制帧(如BSRP帧)时，只能使用一条空间流。
可选的，EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD可能存在两种不同的天线能力配置。一种是EMLSR模式下non-AP MLD的天线能力配置对称，即天线能力配置为每条链路上各一条天线，每条天线上的接收能力都受限，即只能接收部分类型的PPDU，也即每条天线都是受限天线。另一种是EMLSR模式下non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称，即天线能力配置为每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线具有较强的接收能力(称为常规天线)，可表现为这条天线上可接收所有类型的PPDU；其它天线则具有较弱的接收能力(称为受限天线)，即只能接收部分类型的PPDU。常规天线所在的链路可称为接收能力完全链路(RX full capability link)，而受限天线所在链路则可称为接收能力受限链路(RX limitation link)。
本申请中，为便于描述，将“(工作在)EMLSR模式下的non-AP MLD”记为“EMLSRnon-AP MLD”。或者说，EMLSRnon-AP MLD可用于表示non-AP MLD中的一条或多条链路(上的站点)进入EMLSR模式。同理，可以将“EMLSRnon-AP MLD中进入EMLSR模式的站点”记为“EMLSR STA”。
基于上述内容以及目前标准的相关描述，在EMLSR模式下至少存在以下问题：
对于和EMLSR non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD(为便于描述，下文将“与EMLSR non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD”简称为“关联的AP MLD”)而言，整个EMLSRnon-AP MLD或EMLSRSTA都可能因为某些原因(比如不同设备或不同技术的共存(coexistence))出现不可 用的情况。举例来说，EMLSR non-AP MLD中的某个EMLSR STA通过蓝牙等非Wi-Fi技术和其它non-AP MLD或其它单链路STA在当前链路(也就是这个EMLSR STA工作的链路)进行通信，此时该当前链路的资源被占用，也就是说该EMLSR STA处于忙碌(busy)状态，关联的AP MLD无法在该链路上和EMLSR non-AP MLD通信(如发送初始控制帧)。换句话说，当整个EMLSRnon-AP MLD出现不可用时，关联的AP MLD无法与EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行通信。同理，当EMLSRnon-AP MLD的某些链路或这些链路上的STA出现不可用时，关联的AP MLD无法在这些链路上与EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行通信。然而，根据现有标准和技术，AP MLD并不知道当前与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD是否出现了不可用的情况，那么当AP MLD想要与EMLSRnon-AP MLD或EMLSRnon-AP MLD中的一个或多个STA进行通信时，就会向EMLSRnon-AP MLD或EMLSRnon-AP MLD中的一个或多个STA发送初始控制帧。而EMLSRnon-AP MLD或EMLSRnon-AP MLD中的一个或多个STA因为链路资源被占用或者说天线资源被占用，无法正确接收AP MLD发送的初始控制帧，也就无法响应该初始控制帧。AP MLD因为未收到初始控制帧的响应，可能会重复发送初始控制帧。而AP MLD每次发送初始控制帧之前，都会进行信道竞争，以获得信道资源来发送初始控制帧。这样将导致资源的浪费。
再举例来说，如果EMLSR non-AP MLD想要接收某条链路上下一个目标信标发送间隔(target beacon transmission time，TBTT)的组寻址帧(group addressed frame)，那么在下个TBTT到来前EMLSR non-AP MLD需要把其它链路上的天线/空间流切换到该链路上进行接收；或者说和EMLSR non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD应至少提前一个传输时延(transition delay)，中止AP MLD在其它链路上发起的帧交换(frame exchange)，这样其它链路上的天线/空间流才可以切换到准备发送groupaddressed frame的链路上进行接收。但是，根据现有的协议，AP MLD并不知道EMLSR non-AP MLD准备接收哪条链路上哪个TBTT的group addressed frame，因此AP MLD可能在EMLSR non-AP MLD接收group addressed frame的时间内给某些不可用的链路发送初始控制帧，导致资源浪费。
本申请实施例提供一种EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法，当整个EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA因为某些原因(例如，多设备或多技术共存，或者EMLSR non-AP MLD想要接收某条链路上下一个TBTT的group addressed frame)暂时不可用时，该EMLSR non-AP MLD可以通知与其关联的AP MLD，自己链路的状态变化；当整个EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA结束不可用，准备恢复到监听模式(listening mode)时，该EMLSR non-AP MLD也可以通知与其关联的AP MLD。从而使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD的链路的状态变化，避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。
下面将结合更多的附图对本申请提供的技术方案进行详细说明。
本申请提供的技术方案通过多个实施例进行阐述，具体参见下文的描述。可理解的，本申请各个实施例所描述的技术方案可以任一组合形成新的实施例且所涉及概念或方案相同或相似的部分可以相互参考或组合。下面分别对各个实施例进行详细说明。
应理解，本申请中的AP MLD和EMLSRnon-AP MLD均支持802.11be协议(或称为Wi-Fi7，EHT协议)，还可以支持其他WLAN通信协议，如802.11ax，802.11ac等协议。应理解，本申请中的AP MLD和EMLSRnon-AP MLD还可以支持802.11be的下一代协议。也就是说， 本申请提供的方法不仅适用于802.11be协议，还可以适用于802.11be的下一代协议。
可选的，本申请中提及的“禁用”、“不可用”等均是针对AP MLD来说的。举例来说，本申请提及的“EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用”是指对于关联的AP MLD而言，EMLSRnon-AP MLD不可使用；或者说，对于关联的AP MLD而言，其无法与该EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行通信；又或者说，对于关联的AP MLD而言，EMLSRnon-AP MLD不接收或者不回复上行触发帧。但是该EMLSRnon-AP MLD本身是可以与其它non-AP MLD或单链路STA进行通信，也就是说，对于其它non-AP MLD或单链路STA而言，该EMLSRnon-AP MLD仍然是可用的。同理，本申请提及的“EMLSR链路禁用”和“EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路”是指对于关联的AP MLD而言，这些链路不可使用或者被占用；或者说，对于关联的AP MLD而言，其无法在这些链路上与该EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行通信；又或者说，对于关联的AP MLD而言，EMLSRnon-AP MLD无法在这些链路上接收或回复上行触发帧。但是该EMLSRnon-AP MLD可以与其它non-AP MLD或单链路STA在这些链路上进行通信，也就是说，对于其它non-AP MLD或单链路STA而言，该EMLSRnon-AP MLD中的这些链路仍然是可用的。
可选的，工作在EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD在与其关联的AP MLD之间的一组指定的已启用链路上运行(A non-AP MLD may operate in the EMLSR mode on a specified set of the enabled links between the non-AP MLD and its associated AP MLD)。这组应用于EMLSR模式的指定的已启用链路集称为EMLSR链路(The specified set of the enabled links in which the EMLSR mode is applied is called EMLSR links)。那么换句话说，本申请中提及的“EMLSR链路(EMLSR link)”可以指被non-AP MLD用于EMLSR模式的链路，或者说non-AP MLD中进入EMLSR模式的链路，又或者说non-AP MLD中执行监听操作(listening operation)或者处于监听模式(listening mode)的链路等。
实施例一
本申请实施例主要介绍整个EMLSRnon-AP MLD因为某些原因暂时不可用时，该EMLSR non-AP MLD如何通知与其关联的AP MLD；和/或，当整个EMLSR non-AP MLD或其一条链路上的EMLSR STA结束不可用，准备恢复到监听模式(listening mode)时，该EMLSR non-AP MLD又如何通知与其关联的AP MLD。
举例来说，造成整个EMLSRnon-AP MLD不可用的原因可能是：某个EMLSRnon-AP MLD只有两条链路，其中一条链路的天线切换到另一条链路上和其它non-AP MLD或STA进行通信，此时，对于AP MLD而言，整个EMLSRnon-AP MLD是不可用的。或者，某个EMLSRnon-AP MLD有多条链路，其中某些链路上的EMLSR STA不可用，而剩余链路上的EMLSR STA的能力也受到影响，也无法正确接收AP MLD发送的初始控制帧。本申请不限制造成整个EMLSRnon-AP MLD不可用的原因。
参见图5，图5是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法的第一种示意流程图。其中，本申请实施例中EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置既可以是对称的，也可以是不对称的，本申请实施例不限制。如图5所示，该EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S101，EMLSR non-AP MLD生成第一帧，第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD禁用。
S102，EMLSR non-AP MLD发送该第一帧。
可选的，当EMLSR non-AP MLD发现自己所有链路(或所有链路上的STA)即将对于其关联的AP MLD而言不可用时(比如，该EMLSRnon-AP MLD只有两条链路，其中一条链路的天线即将切换到另一条链路上和其它non-AP MLD或STA进行通信)，EMLSR non-AP MLD可以生成第一帧。该第一帧中可以携带第一指示信息，用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD禁用(disabled)。EMLSR non-AP MLD在任意一条可用的链路上发送该第一帧。应理解，当EMLSR non-AP MLD发送完该第一帧后，或者发送完该第一帧的一段时间后，对于其关联的AP MLD而言整个EMLSR non-AP MLD不可用。
其中，上述第一帧可以为数据帧。
S103，AP MLD接收该第一帧。
S104，AP MLD根据该第一帧中的该第一指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用。
可选的，与EMLSR non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD接收上述第一帧，并根据该第一帧中携带的第一指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用。当该AP MLD确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用后，可以不再向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送初始控制帧，直到EMLSRnon-AP MLD恢复可用为止。换句话说，当AP MLD收到EMLSR non-AP MLD进入不可用状态的通知时(即接收到携带第一指示信息的第一帧)，AP MLD不应再给该EMLSR non-AP MLD发送初始控制帧，直到收到该EMLSR non-AP MLD恢复可用的通知。
本申请实施例在EMLSR non-AP MLD因为某些原因暂时不可用的情况下，主动上报自己的链路的状态(可用或不可用/禁用)，可以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD的链路的状态变化，避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送信号，例如发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。另外，本申请实施例只需要在一条链路发送一次通知即可，从而节省开销。
一个可选实施例中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD因为某些原因而暂时不可用后，AP MLD就无法与EMLSR non-AP MLD进行通信。反之，当EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)恢复可用后，AP MLD才能与EMLSR non-AP MLD进行通信。但是根据现有的协议，AP MLD并不知道EMLSR non-AP MLD是否恢复可用。那么，当AP MLD的缓存中有EMLSR non-AP MLD的数据时，AP MLD可能会一直等待，因为AP MLD不知道EMLSR non-AP MLD是否恢复可用，从而使AP MLD和EMLSR non-AP MLD无法正常通信。
因此，本申请实施例可以在EMLSR non-AP MLD恢复可用后，主动告知AP MLD，以使AP MLD可以与EMLSR non-AP MLD进行正常通信。
可选的，本申请实施例(如下文步骤S105和步骤S106)可以单独实施例，当然本申请实施例还可以结合前述实施例(步骤S101-步骤S104)一起实施，复用图5，当本申请实施例与前述实施例一起实施例时，本申请实施例可以在前述步骤S104之后执行，也可以在步骤S101之前执行，本申请实施例不做限制。
本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法还包括以下步骤：
S105，EMLSR non-AP MLD发送第二帧，该第二帧中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD可用。
S106，AP MLD接收该第二帧。
可选的，在EMLSR non-AP MLD进入不可用状态后，如果EMLSR non-AP MLD发现自己的链路恢复可用或者整个EMLSR non-AP MLD恢复可用，EMLSR non-AP MLD可以在恢复可用的链路上向该AP MLD发送第二帧。相应的，AP MLD在恢复可用的链路上接收该第 二帧。该第二帧中可以包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息可以用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)可用(available)，或者说该第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)恢复(resume)，又或者说该第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD(的某条链路)切换回监听操作(switch back to listening operation)。其中，该第二帧可以是数据帧。
可选的，EMLSR non-AP MLD发送第二帧后，也就是EMLSR non-AP MLD发送了自己恢复可用状态的通知后，EMLSR non-AP MLD中的STA可以立即切换到监听模式(listening mode)，或者等待一个规定的时间T(例如一个短帧间间隔(short interframe space，SIFS))后再切换到listening mode。若EMLSR non-AP MLD中恢复可用的链路为接收能力受限链路，则收到通知的AP MLD应至少等待一个传输时延(transition delay)(具体等待时长可能为一个transition delay+规定的时间T)之后再给恢复可用的EMLSR STA发送初始控制帧。若EMLSR non-AP MLD中恢复可用的链路为接收能力完全链路，则收到通知的AP MLD可以不用等待直接给恢复可用的EMLSR STA发送初始控制帧，或者等待一个规定的时间T之后再给恢复可用的EMLSR STA发送初始控制帧。
可选的，若EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称，且其中的接收能力完全链路可用时，AP MLD可以在发送给EMLSR non-AP MLD的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。具体的，该指示信息的可能实现可参考下文实施例四和实施例五的描述，此处不展开说明。
本申请实施例在EMLSR non-AP MLD或其一条链路上的EMLSR STA结束不可用，准备恢复到监听模式(listening mode)时，通过第二指示信息告知AP MLD；以使AP MLD及时获知EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路，便于AP MLD调度EMLSRnon-AP MLD进行上行传输或向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送下行数据等。
以上内容介绍了本申请实施例的可能流程，下面分别介绍第一指示信息和第二指示信息的可能实现方式。
可理解的，对于单链路设备而言，多设备或多技术共存(coexistence)问题，可以通过操作模式(operating mode，OM)控制(control)子字段来解决。具体的，单链路STA在与其他站点通信之前，可以通过在数据帧中携带OM Control子字段来通知与该STA关联的AP：它当前支持哪些类型的基于触发的上行多用户传输。参见图6，图6是本申请实施例提供的OM控制子字段的帧格式示意图。如图6所示，该OM控制子字段包括但不限于上行(uplink，UL)多用户(multi-user，MU)禁用(UL MU Disable)子字段和上行多用户数据禁用(UL MU Data Disable)子字段。该UL MU Disable(上行多用户禁用)子字段和UL MU Data Disable(上行多用户数据禁用)子字段可以用于共同/联合指示单链路non-AP STA是否可以回应AP端发送的不同类型的触发帧。具体的，当UL MU Disable子字段设置为0，且UL MU Data Disable子字段也设置为0时，表示STA允许且会回复所有类型的触发帧。当UL MU Disable子字段设置为0，且UL MU Data Disable子字段设置为1，表示如果STA收到基础触发帧(basic trigger frame)，该STA不会回复上行多用户数据帧(UL MU Data frame)，但如果收到其它类型的触发帧，STA可以进行上行多用户传输。当UL MU Disable子字段设置为1，UL MU Data Disable子字段设置为0，表示无论STA收到什么类型的触发帧，都不会进行上行多用户传输。UL MU Disable子字段设置为1，UL MU Data Disable子字段设置为1，为保留情况。
第一种实现方式中：第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以通过同一字段的不同值表示。
具体的，第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以位于高吞吐率(high throughput，HT)控制字段的EHT OM control子字段中。其中，EHT OM Control子字段为OM Control子字段在EHT背景下的扩展。举例来说，可以将EHT OM control子字段中的预留比特作为一个子字段，这个子字段的不同值可以用于表示第一指示信息和第二指示信息；为便于描述，EHT OM control子字段中这个新增的子字段称为多链路设备禁用/恢复(MLD Disable/Resume)子字段，当然，这个新增的子字段也可以有其他名称，本申请实施例不做限制。可理解的，OM Control子字段下的UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段可以用于指示单链路情况下STA是否回应某些trigger帧，因此MLD Disable/Resume子字段的使用规则需要和单链路情况进行区分。
参见图7a，图7a是本申请实施例提供的HT Control字段中OM Control子字段和EHT OM control子字段的一帧格式示意图。如图7a所示，该EHT OM control子字段包括但不限于1比特的MLD Disable/Resume子字段。当MLD Disable/Resume子字段设置为1时，表示第一指示信息，用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD禁用(disabled)。此时，HT Control字段中可以保留OM Control子字段的全部或部分，并且如果存在UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段，则将UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为1。当然，此时HT Control字段中也可以不存在OM Control子字段。
当MLD Disable/Resume子字段设置为0时，表示第二指示信息，用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的所有链路可用(available)，或者说指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的所有链路从不可用状态恢复(resume)，又或者说指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的所有链路切换回监听操作(switch back to listening operation)。此时，HT Control字段中可以保留OM Control子字段的全部或部分，并且如果存在UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段，则将UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为1。当然，此时HT Control字段中也可以不存在OM Control子字段。
可选的，上述HT Control字段中包括OM Control子字段和EHT OM control子字段，OM Control子字段中包括UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段，EHT OM control子字段中包括MLD Disable/Resume子字段。当MLD Disable/Resume子字段设置为0且UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为0时，用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路(从不可用恢复)可用，或者用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路切换回监听操作。其中，该第一链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD发送上述第二帧的链路。也就是说，当MLD Disable/Resume子字段设置为0且UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为0时，指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的某条链路从不可用的状态恢复，这条链路就是发送第二帧的链路。
应理解，当OM Control子字段用于指示单链路情况下STA的不同行为时，即实现它原有的功能时，EHT OM control子字段中可以不存在MLD Disable/Resume子字段。
还应理解，图7a所示的帧格式中各个子字段的名称和长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不限制。
本申请实施例通过在HT Control字段的EHT OM Control子字段内增加一比特的MLD Disable/Resume子字段，来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD禁用和EMLSR non-AP MLD从不可用恢复到listening mode；可以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD的链路的状态变化，避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上发送初始控制帧，从而减少 资源的浪费。
第二种实现方式中：第一指示信息和第二指示信息分别通过不同的字段实现。
具体的，第一指示信息可以第一指示信息和第二指示信息可以分别位于HT控制字段的EHT OM control子字段中。举例来说，可以将第一指示信息携带于EHT OM control子字段的一个预留比特中，为便于描述，这个预留比特称为多链路设备禁用(MLD Disable)子字段，当然这个预留比特也可以有其他名称，本申请实施例不做限制。将第二指示信息携带于EHT OM control子字段的另一个预留比特中，为便于描述，这个预留比特称为多链路设备恢复(MLD Resume)子字段，当然这个预留比特也可以有其他名称，本申请实施例不做限制。
参见图7b，图7b是本申请实施例提供的HT Control字段中OM Control子字段和EHT OM control子字段的另一帧格式示意图。如图7b所示，该EHT OM control子字段包括但不限于1比特的MLD Disable子字段(即上述第一指示信息)和1比特的MLD Resume子字段(即上述第二指示信息)。当MLD Disable子字段设置为1时，指示EMLSR non-AP MLD禁用(disabled)。此时，HT Control字段中可以保留OM Control子字段的全部或部分，并且如果存在UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段，则将UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为1。当然，此时HT Control字段中也可以不存在OM Control子字段。可选的，当MLD Disable子字段设置为0时，表示预留。
当MLD Resume子字段设置为1时，指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的所有链路可用(available)，或者说指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的所有链路从不可用状态恢复(resume)，又或者说指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的所有链路切换回监听操作(switch back to listening operation)。此时，HT Control字段中可以保留OM Control子字段的全部或部分，并且如果存在UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段，则将UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为1。当然，此时HT Control字段中也可以不存在OM Control子字段。可选的，当MLD Resume子字段设置为0时，表示预留。
可选的，上述HT Control字段中包括OM Control子字段和EHT OM control子字段，OM Control子字段中包括UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段，EHT OM control子字段中包括MLD Disable子字段和MLD Resume子字段。当MLD Resume子字段设置为1且UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为0时，用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路(从不可用恢复)可用，或者用于联合指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的第一链路切换回监听操作。其中，该第一链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD发送上述第二帧的链路。也就是说，当MLD Resume子字段设置为1且UL MU Disable子字段和UL MU Data Disable子字段均设置为0时，指示EMLSR non-AP MLD的某条链路从不可用的状态恢复，这条链路就是发送第二帧的链路。
应理解，当OM Control子字段用于指示单链路情况下STA的不同行为时，即实现它原有的功能时，EHT OM control子字段中可以不存在MLD Disable子字段和MLD Resume子字段和。
还应理解，图7b所示的帧格式中各个子字段的名称和长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不限制。
本申请实施例通过在EHT OM Control子字段内增加一比特的MLD Disable子字段来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD禁用，再增加一比特的Resume子字段来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD从不可用恢复到listening mode；其含义清晰。
实施例二
本申请实施例主要介绍当EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA因为某些原因暂时不可用，或者结束不可用准备恢复到监听模式(listening mode)时，该EMLSR non-AP MLD如何显示通知与其关联的AP MLD。
参见图8，图8是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法的第二种示意流程图。其中，本申请实施例中EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置既可以是对称的，也可以是不对称的，本申请实施例不限制。如图8所示，该EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S201，EMLSR non-AP MLD生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。
S202，EMLSR non-AP MLD发送该第三帧。
可选的，当EMLSR non-AP MLD发现自己的全部或部分链路的状态发生变化时，比如：对于和EMLSR non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD而言，EMLSR non-AP MLD中的至少一条链路(上的站点)不可使用或从不可用恢复到listening mode；EMLSR non-AP MLD可以生成第三帧。该第三帧中可以携带第四指示信息，可选的还可以携带第三指示信息。该第三指示信息可以用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。该第四指示信息可以用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。EMLSR non-AP MLD再可以在任意一条可用的链路上发送该第三帧。可选的，EMLSR non-AP MLD在发送完该第三帧后，或者发送完该第三帧的一段时间后，EMLSR non-AP MLD的链路的状态才发生变化。也可以是，EMLSR non-AP MLD在发送该第三帧之前，或者发送该第三帧前的一段时间，EMLSR non-AP MLD的链路的状态就发生了变化。
可选的，上述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括但不限于：EMLSR链路禁用，和EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。
为更好地理解上述第三指示信息和第四指示信息的指示方式，下面对其可能的实现方式进行举例说明。
实现方式一
上述第三指示信息可以用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，上述第四指示信息可以用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路(EMLSR链路)。示例性的，第四指示信息可以通过比特位图来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路，也就是说，比特位图中一个比特对应一条链路，当该比特位图中的某个比特设置为1时，表示该比特对应的链路是可用的链路。或者，第四指示信息也可以通过链路标识(link ID)来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路，也就是说，链路标识所标识的链路为可用的链路。本申请实施例不做限制。
可选的，该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息可以位于HT控制字段的AP援助请求(AP assistance request，AAR)控制子字段中。举例来说，可以利用AAR控制子字段中的预留比特来指示是否存在EMLSR non-AP MLD的链路的状态发生变化，为便于描述，这个预留比特可称为EMLSR链路更新(EMLSR Link Update)子字段；并可以复用AAR控制子字段中的援助AP链路标识比特位图(Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap)来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的具体链路。
参见图9a，图9a是本申请实施例提供的AAR控制子字段的一帧格式示意图。如图9a所示，该AAR控制子字段包括但不限于：16比特的AP链路标识比特位图(Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap)和1比特的EMLSR链路更新(EMLSR Link Update)子字段。其中，当EMLSR  Link Update子字段设置为1时(即上述第三指示信息)，指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，也就是说可能出现了链路不可用或恢复可用的情况。EMLSR Link Update子字段设置为0时，说明不存在链路状态变化。应理解，EMLSR Link Update子字段置0表示存在链路状态变化，还是置1表示存在链路状态变化，本申请实施例不做限制。当EMLSR Link Update子字段设置为1时，Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap(即上述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。应理解，如果Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap中所有比特均为0，说明EMLSR non-AP MLD的所有链路都不可用，或者说不存在可用的链路，也就是说EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路数为0，或者说，整个EMLSR non-AP MLD不可用。
本申请实施例通过在AAR控制子字段中增加non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化的指示(即EMLSR Link Update子字段)，并复用Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap，但修改Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap的含义以指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。无需新设计帧格式和流程，减少信令开销。
可选的，该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息可以位于聚合控制(Aggregated-control，A-control)子字段中。举例来说，可以重新设计一种A-Control子字段变种(variant)，用于携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息。
参见图9b，图9b是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的一帧格式示意图。如图9b所示，该A-Control子字段包括但不限于：16比特的EMLSR链路标识比特位图(EMLSR Link ID Bitmap)和1比特的EMLSR链路更新(EMLSR Link Update)子字段。其中，EMLSR Link Update子字段的取值和含义可参考前述图9a的描述，此处不赘述。当EMLSR Link Update子字段设置为1时，EMLSR Link ID Bitmap(即上述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。应理解，如果EMLSR Link ID Bitmap中所有比特均为0，说明EMLSR non-AP MLD中不存在可用的链路，也就是说EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路数为0，或者说，整个EMLSR non-AP MLD不可用。还应理解，EMLSR Link ID Bitmap中置0的比特表示可用的链路，还是置1的比特表示可用的链路，本申请实施例不做限制。
本申请实施例通过新设计一种A-Control子字段来携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息，其含义清晰，并且传统站点不会发生误读(因为传统站点读不懂新设计的A-Control子字段)。
可选的，该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息可以位于EML操作模式通知(operating mode notification，OMN)帧的EML控制字段中，并且EML控制字段中包括的EMLSR模式子字段设置为1。也就是说，上述第三帧为EML OMN帧。举例来说，可以利用EML控制字段中的预留比特来指示是否存在EMLSR non-AP MLD的链路的状态发生变化，为便于描述，这个预留比特可称为EMLSR链路更新(EMLSR Link Update)子字段；并可以复用EML控制字段中的EMLSR链路比特位图(EMLSR linkbitmap)来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的具体链路。
进一步可选的，因为EML Control字段是可扩展的，所以EMLSR non-AP MLD还可以在在第三帧中携带一些相关信息，例如状态变化的开始时间，可用状态下的EMLSR STA的具体能力等。换句话说，携带上述第三指示信息和第四指示信息的EML OMN帧(即上述第三帧)中还可以包括以下一项或多项信息：链路的状态发生变化的开始时间，EMLSR non-AP MLD中当前可用的链路的收发能力等。
参见图9c，图9c是本申请实施例提供的EML控制字段的一帧格式示意图。如图9c所 示，EML控制字段包括但不限于：1比特的EMLSR模式(EMLSR mode)子字段、16比特的EMLSR链路比特位图(EMLSR Link Bitmap)、以及1比特的EMLSR链路更新(EMLSR Link Update)子字段。其中，EMLSR mode子字段设置为1。EMLSR Link Update子字段的取值和含义可参考前述图9a的描述，此处不赘述。EMLSR LinkBitmap的取值和含义可参考前述图9b中EMLSR Link ID Bitmap的相关描述，此处不再赘述。如图9c所示，该EML控制字段还可以包括：开始时间(starttime)子字段，和/或支持的EHT-MCS(调制与编码策略，Modulation and coding strategy)和NSS(空间流数，Number of spatial streams)集(Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set)子字段。其中，starttime子字段用于指示链路的状态发生变化的开始时间。Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段用于指示当前可用的链路的具体收发能力。该Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段的设计可采用802.11be D1.4 9.4.2.313.1章节，此处不展开说明。
本申请实施例通过EML OMN帧(即上述第三帧)的EML控制字段来携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息，因为EML控制字段可扩展，所以还可以同时携带一些可选信息；其实现更灵活，可携带的信息更丰富。
应理解，上述图9a-图9c所示的各个子字段的名称、顺序以及长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不限制。
一个可选实施例中，EMLSR non-AP MLD生成并发送第三帧，该第三帧中包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示是否存在EMLSR non-AP MLD的链路的状态发生变化；当该第三指示信息指示存在EMLSR non-AP MLD的链路的状态发生变化时，该第三帧还包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。其中，该第三指示信息可以参考前述实现方式一中EMLSR Link Update子字段的相关描述，该第四指示信息可以参考前述实现方式一中的相关描述，此处不赘述。
实现方式二
如果non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化为EMLSR链路禁用，上述第三指示信息具体用于指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，或者用于指示一个或多个EMLSR链路不再是EMLSR链路的成员且不会被non-AP MLD用于EMLSR模式(indicate that one or more EMLSR link will not be used by the non-AP MLD for the EMLSR mode and will not be a member of the EMLSR links)。相应的上述第四指示信息可以用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中禁用的EMLSR链路。如果non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化为EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路，上述第三指示信息具体用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为(或恢复为)可用的EMLSR链路，或者用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路切换回监听操作，或者用于指示一个或多个EMLSR链路将被non-AP MLD用于EMLSR模式并成为EMLSR链路的成员，或者切换回监听(indicate that one or more EMLSR link will not be used by the non-AP MLD for the EMLSR mode and will not be a member of the EMLSR links)。相应的上述第四指示信息可以用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中从不可用变为可用的EMLSR链路。
示例性的，上述第四指示信息可以为比特位图，该第四指示信息的一个比特对应一条链路。当该第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第一值时，用于指示该比特对应的链路是可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。当该第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第二值时，用于指示该 比特对应的链路是不可用的链路或状态未发生变化的链路。其中，第一值可以为1，第二值为0；或者第一值为0，第二值为1；本申请实施例不做限制。示例性的，上述第四指示信息也可以用链路标识(link ID)来表示。
可选的，上述第三指示信息可以通过2个子字段来表示，其中一个字段用于指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，另一个子字段用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。换句话说，上述第三指示信息可以具体用于指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，且EMLSR non-AP MLD中不存在不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。或者，上述第三指示信息可以具体用于指示不存在EMLSR链路禁用，且EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路。或者，上述第三指示信息可以具体用于指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，且EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的EMLSR链路；此时上述第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
可选的，第三指示信息和第四指示信息位于HT控制字段的AP援助请求(AP assistance request，AAR)控制子字段中。一种实现方式中，第三指示信息用一个子字段来表示。参见图10a，图10a是本申请实施例提供的AAR控制子字段的另一帧格式示意图。如图10a所示，该AAR控制子字段包括但不限于：16比特的Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap和1比特的EMLSR链路禁用/恢复(EMLSR Link Disable/Resume)子字段。其中，当EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段(即上述第三指示信息)设置为1时，指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，也就是说存在EMLSR链路进入不可用状态。此时，Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap(即上述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中禁用的EMLSR链路，置0的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。换句话说，当EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段置1，说明存在EMLSR链路进入不可用状态，此时可以通过将Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap内不可用的链路对应的比特置1来进行指示；置0同理。当EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段(即上述第三指示信息)设置为0时，指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为(或恢复为)可用的EMLSR链路，或者指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路切换回监听操作。此时，Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap(即上述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中从不可用变为可用的EMLSR链路，置0的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路。换句话说，当EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段置0，说明EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在链路从不可用状态恢复，此时可以通过将Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap内恢复可用的EMLSR链路对应的比特置1来进行指示；置0同理。
另一种实现方式中，第三指示信息用两个子字段来表示。参见图10b，图10b是本申请实施例提供的AAR控制子字段的又一帧格式示意图。如图10b所示，该AAR控制子字段包括但不限于：16比特的Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap、1比特的EMLSR链路禁用(EMLSR Link Disable)子字段、以及1比特的EMLSR链路恢复(EMLSR Link Resume)子字段。其中，当EMLSR Link Disable子字段(即上述第三指示信息中的一个子指示信息)设置为1时，指示存在EMLSR链路禁用，也就是说存在EMLSR链路进入不可用状态。此时，Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap(即上述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中禁用的EMLSR链路，置0的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。当EMLSR Link Disable子字段设置为0时，表示预留或者不存在EMLSR链路禁用。当EMLSR Link Resume子字段(即上述第三指示信息中的另一个子指示信息)设置为1时，指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为(或恢复为)可用的EMLSR链路，或者指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路切换回监听操作。此时，Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap(即上 述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中从不可用变为可用的EMLSR链路，置0的比特所对应的链路为EMLSR non-AP MLD中不可用的链路。当EMLSR Link Resume子字段设置为0时，表示预留或者EMLSR non-AP MLD中不存在不可用的链路切换回监听操作。
应理解，上述图10a和图10b所示的各个子字段的名称、顺序以及长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
可选的，第三指示信息和第四指示信息位于聚合控制(Aggregated-control，A-control)子字段中。举例来说，可以重新设计一种A-Control子字段变种(variant)，用于携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息；而不是复用现有的用于实现其它功能的A-Control子字段。一种实现方式中，第三指示信息用一个子字段来表示。参见图11a，图11a是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的另一帧格式示意图。如图11a所示，该A-Control子字段包括但不限于：16比特的EMLSR链路标识比特位图(EMLSR Link ID Bitmap)和1比特的EMLSR链路禁用/恢复(EMLSR Link Disable/Resume)子字段。其中，EMLSR Link ID Bitmap的取值和含义可以参考前述图10a或图10b中Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap的描述，此处不再赘述。EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段的取值和含义可以参考前述图10a中的相关描述，此处不赘述。
另一种实现方式中，第三指示信息用两个子字段来表示。参见图11b，图11b是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的又一帧格式示意图。如图11b所示，该A-Control子字段包括但不限于：16比特的EMLSR Link ID Bitmap、1比特的EMLSR链路禁用(EMLSR Link Disable)子字段、以及1比特的EMLSR链路恢复(EMLSR Link Resume)子字段。其中，EMLSR Link ID Bitmap的取值和含义可以参考前述图10a或图10b中Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap的描述，此处不再赘述。EMLSR Link Disable子字段和EMLSR Link Resume子字段的取值和含义可以参考前述图10b中的相关描述，此处不赘述。
应理解，上述图11a和图11b所示的各个子字段的名称、顺序以及长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
可选的，第三指示信息和第四指示信息位于EML操作模式通知(operating mode notification，OMN)帧的EML控制字段中，并且EML控制字段中包括的EMLSR模式子字段设置为1。也就是说，上述第三帧为EML OMN帧。因为EML Control字段是可扩展的，所以EMLSR non-AP MLD还可以在第三帧中携带一些相关信息，例如不可用状态的开始时间、结束时间和其余可用状态下的EMLSR STA的具体能力等。换句话说，EML控制字段中还可以包括以下一项或多项信息：禁用的开始时间，可用的开始时间，禁用的结束时间，禁用的持续时间，EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路的收发能力。
一种实现方式中，第三指示信息用一个子字段来表示。参见图12a，图12a是本申请实施例提供的EML控制字段的另一帧格式示意图。如图12a所示，EML控制字段包括但不限于：1比特的EMLSR模式(EMLSR mode)子字段、16比特的EMLSR链路比特位图(EMLSR Link Bitmap)、以及1比特的EMLSR链路禁用/恢复(EMLSR Link Disable/Resume)子字段。其中，EMLSR mode子字段设置为1。EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段的取值和含义可以参考前述图10a中的相关描述，此处不赘述。EMLSR Link Bitmap的取值和含义可以参考前述图10a或图10b中Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap的描述，此处不赘述。可选的，当EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段设置为1，指示存在EMLSR链路进入不可用状态时，图12a所示的EML控制字段还可包括Start Time子字段、结束时间(endtime)子字段、持续时间(duration)子字段、Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段中的一个或多个。此时，Start Time子字段 用于指示禁用的开始时间，endtime子字段用于指示禁用的结束时间，duration子字段用于指示禁用的持续时间，Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段用于指示当前可用的链路的具体收发能力。其中，Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段的设计可采用802.11be D1.49.4.2.313.1章节，此处不展开说明。当EMLSR Link Disable/Resume子字段设置为0，指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为(或恢复为)可用的EMLSR链路时，图12a所示的EML控制字段还可包括Start Time子字段，用于指示可用的开始时间，即不可用的链路恢复为可用的EMLSR链路的时间。
另一种实现方式中，第三指示信息用两个子字段来表示。参见图12b，图12b是本申请实施例提供的EML控制字段的又一帧格式示意图。如图12b所示，EML控制字段包括但不限于：1比特的EMLSR模式(EMLSR mode)子字段、16比特的EMLSR链路比特位图(EMLSR Link Bitmap)、1比特的EMLSR Link Disable子字段、以及1比特的EMLSR Link Resume子字段。可选的，EML控制字段还可包括Start Time子字段、结束时间(endtime)子字段、持续时间(duration)子字段、Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段中的一个或多个。其中，EMLSR mode子字段设置为1。EMLSR Link Disable子字段和EMLSR Link Resume子字段的取值和含义可以参考前述图10b中的相关描述，此处不赘述。EMLSR Link Bitmap的取值和含义可以参考前述图10a或图10b中Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap的描述，此处不赘述。Start Time子字段、结束时间(endtime)子字段、持续时间(duration)子字段、以及Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段可参考前述图12a中的相应描述，此处不赘述。
应理解，上述图12a和图12b所示的各个子字段的名称、顺序以及长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
上述内容详细阐述了本申请实施例中发送端的流程，在本申请的另一些实施例中，对应前述发送端的流程(步骤S201和步骤S202)，接收端的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S203，AP MLD接收该第三帧。该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，可选的该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息。该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化。该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。具体的，第三指示信息和第四指示信息的实现方式参考前文的描述，此处不再赘述。
S204，AP MLD根据该第三帧中的第四指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路。
可选的，与EMLSR non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD接收到上述第三帧后，根据该第三帧中携带的第三指示信息和第四指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路。当AP(或AP MLD)端收到EMLSR non-AP MLD(或其某些链路)进入不可用状态的通知时，AP端不应再在不可用的链路上给该EMLSR non-AP MLD发送初始控制帧，直到收到该不可用的链路恢复可用通知为止。
当EMLSR non-AP MLD发送了不可用的链路恢复可用的通知后，这些恢复可用的链路上的EMLSR STA可以立即切换到listening mode，或者等待一个规定的时间T(例如一个短帧间间隔(short interframe space，SIFS))后再切换到listening mode。若EMLSR non-AP MLD中恢复可用的链路为接收能力受限链路，则收到通知的AP(或AP MLD)应至少等待一个传输时延(transition delay)(具体等待时长可能为一个transition delay+规定的时间T)之后再给恢复可用的EMLSR STA发送初始控制帧。若EMLSR non-AP MLD中恢复可用的链路为接收 能力完全链路，则收到通知的AP(或AP MLD)可以不用等待直接给恢复可用的EMLSR STA发送初始控制帧，或者等待一个规定的时间T之后再给恢复可用的EMLSR STA发送初始控制帧。
可选的，在EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称的情况下，当EMLSR non-AP MLD中接收能力完全链路可用时，AP MLD可以在接收能力完全链路上给EMLSR non-AP MLD发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，并在其中携带指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，或者用于指示对于某个站点而言接收到的该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。具体的，该指示信息的可能实现可参考下文实施例四和实施例五的描述，此处不展开说明。
本申请实施例在EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA因为某些原因暂时不可用的情况下，主动上报自己的链路的状态变化，并上报发生变化的链路，以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD的链路的状态变化和发生变化的链路，从而避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上向EMLSRnon-AP MLD发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。
实施例三
本申请实施例主要介绍当EMLSR non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的EMLSR STA因为某些原因暂时不可用，或者结束不可用准备恢复到监听模式(listening mode)时，通过隐式指示的方式来通知与其关联的AP MLD，EMLSR non-AP MLD的链路的状态变化。
参见图13，图13是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法的第三种示意流程图。其中，本申请实施例中EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置既可以是对称的，也可以是不对称的，本申请实施例不限制。如图13所示，该EMLSR模式下链路状态指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S301，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，EMLSR non-AP MLD生成第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路。
S302，EMLSR non-AP MLD向AP MLD发送该第一EML OMN帧。
可选的，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN(此时交换的两个EML OMN帧中的EMLSR mode子字段均设置为1)帧进入EMLSR模式后，EMLSR non-AP MLD可以又生成一个EML OMN帧(为便于区分，此时生成的EML OMN帧称为第一EML OMN帧)。EMLSR non-AP MLD可以在任意一条可用的链路上向该AP MLD发送该第一EML OMN帧。该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新后的EMLSR链路。该第一EML OMN帧的帧格式可以参考现有标准中EML OMN帧的描述，此处不赘述。换句话说，本申请实施例增加了EML OMN帧的功能，未改变EML OMN帧的帧格式。其中，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图(EMLSR Link Bitmap)，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1。EMLSR Link Bitmap指示non-AP MLD在EMLSR模式下使用的可用链路的子集(The EMLSR Link Bitmap subfield indicates the subset of the enabled links that is used by the non-AP MLD in the EMLSR mode)，具体可参考现有标准的描述。EMLSR Link ID Bitmap中值为1的比特所对应的链路将被non-AP MLD用于EMLSR模式，并将成为EMLSR链路的成员或者切换回侦听模式。换句话说，EMLSR Link Bitmap内值为1的比特所对应链路为当 前可用的链路。
可选的，上述第一EML OMN帧的EML控制字段还可以包括以下一项或多项信息：EMLSR链路更新的开始时间，EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路的收发能力。举例来说，EML控制字段中可以新增开始时间(starttime)子字段来指示EMLSR链路更新的开始时间，和Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段来指示当前可用的链路的具体收发能力。其中，Supported EHT-MCS And NSS Set子字段的设计可采用802.11be D1.4 9.4.2.313.1章节，此处不展开说明。
S303，AP MLD接收该第一EML OMN帧。
S304，AP MLD根据该第一EML OMN帧，确定EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
可选的，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN(此时交换的两个EML OMN帧中的EMLSR mode子字段均设置为1)帧进入EMLSR模式后，AP MLD又收到了该EMLSR non-AP MLD发送的新的EML OMN帧(即上述第一EML OMN帧)，且EMLSR mode子字段仍为1，说明此时该EMLSR non-AP MLD并不是准备退出EMLSR模式，因此AP MLD可以将这个新的EMLSR mode子字段为1的EML OMN帧(即上述第一EML OMN帧)理解为EMLSR链路状态变化的通知。AP MLD再可以根据该第一EML OMN帧中EMLSR Link Bitmap的指示，确定EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路，也就是EMLSR Link Bitmap内值为1的比特所对应的链路。
本申请实施例无需新增字段(或子字段)来指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中链路状态的变化，而是通过增加EML OMN帧的功能和具体的规则来实现链路状态变化的通知；能够使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的EMLSRnon-AP MLD当前可用的链路，从而避免AP MLD在EMLSRnon-AP MLD的不可用链路上发送初始控制帧，从而减少资源的浪费。
因为EMLSR non-AP MLD可能存在天线能力配置不对称的链路，即每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线具有较强的接收能力，可接收所有类型的PPDU；另一条天线则是较弱的接收能力，只能接收部分类型的PPDU。所以AP可以与天线接收能力较强的EMLSR STA正常通信，而不需要借助其它链路上的天线；那么AP给天线接收能力较强的EMLSR STA发送下行数据前可以不用发送初始控制帧。因此，当该EMLSR STA收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧时，该EMLSR STA无法确认收到的帧是否为初始控制帧，也就是说，EMLSR non-AP MLD无法确定是否需要将其它链路上的天线/空间流临时切换到该EMLSR STA工作的链路上。可理解的，虽然AP可以与天线接收能力较强的EMLSR STA正常通信而不需要借助其它链路上的天线，但是该EMLSR STA可能需要采用多空间流传输，故而即使该EMLSR STA的接收能力较强，但该EMLSR STA工作的链路上只有一条天线，无法实现多空间流；所以可能仍然需要将其它链路上的天线/空间流临时切换到该EMLSR STA工作的链路上。
针对EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称的情况下，接收能力完全链路上的STA无法分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧的问题，本申请还提供一种EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法，通过在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧增加指示信息，来指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧；以使接收能力完全链路上的EMLSR STA可以分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，从而明确自己收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧后的行为。
下面详细介绍本申请提供的一种EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法。
实施例四
本申请实施例主要介绍在EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称的情况下，接收能力完全链路上的STA如何分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
可选的，本申请实施例四可以与前述实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例结合一起实施，也可以单独实施例，本申请不做限制。
参见图14，图14是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法的一示意流程图。其中，本申请实施例中EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置是不对称的，即EMLSR non-AP MLD的每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线为常规天线，其它天线为受限天线。常规天线所在的链路称为接收能力完全链路(RX full capability link)，而受限天线所在链路称为接收能力受限链路(RX limitation link)。如图14所示，该EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S401，AP MLD生成控制帧，该控制帧中包括第一用户信息字段，该第一用户信息字段中包括关联标识符12子字段和指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该关联标识符12子字段所指示的站点接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。
S402，AP MLD发送该控制帧。
S403，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收该控制帧。
S404，EMLSR non-AP MLD确定接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。
其中，上述控制帧为MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。
其中，EMLSR non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间存在多条链路，这多条链路中包括至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路。
可选的，AP MLD可以生成并发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。相应的，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收该控制帧。该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中包括一个或多个用户信息字段。一种实现方式中，在每个用户信息字段中都携带指示信息。另一种实现方式中，只在EMLSR站点对应的用户信息字段中携带指示信息。上述第一用户信息字段(指每个用户信息字段，或者EMLSR站点对应的用户信息字段)中包括关联标识符(associationidentify，AID)12子字段和指示信息。AID 12子字段用于指示站点。该指示信息可以用于指示该AID 12子字段所指示的站点接收到的该控制帧(即MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧)是否为初始控制帧。其中，EMLSR站点是EMLSR non-AP MLD中进入EMLSR模式的站点。
可选的，上述指示信息的长度可以为1比特，当该指示信息设置为第一值时，表示该AID12子字段所指示的站点接收到的该控制帧(即MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧)是初始控制帧；当该指示信息设置为第二值时，表示该AID 12子字段所指示的站点接收到的该控制帧(即MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧)不是初始控制帧。其中，第一值为1，第二值为0；或者，第一值为0，第二值为1；本申请实施例不做限制。
示例性的，上述指示信息可以通过用户信息(userinfo)字段的1个预留比特来表示，为便于描述，该指示信息可以称为EMLSR初始控制(EMLSR Initial Control)子字段。参见图15，图15是本申请实施例提供的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中用户信息字段的帧格式示意图。如图15所示，MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中用户信息字段包括但不限于AID 12子字段和1比特的EMLSR初始控制子字段。
当EMLSR Initial Control子字段设置为0时，表示当前MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧对由AID12子字段指示的STA而言为普通控制帧；或者说，该AID 12子字段所指示的站点接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧不是初始控制帧。应理解，若收到当前MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧且AID和AID12子字段相同的STA是EMLSR STA(这里的EMLSR STA是接收能力完全链路上的 STA)，则该EMLSR STA不需要进入EMLSR模式，也就是说，EMLSR non-AP MLD无需将其它(指定)链路上的天线/空间流切换到接收初始控制帧的链路上；只需要回复对应的响应帧。
当EMLSR Initial Control子字段设置为1时，说明当前MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧对由AID12子字段指示的STA而言为初始控制帧；或者说，该AID 12子字段所指示的站点接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是初始控制帧。所以，收到该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧且AID和AID12子字段相同的EMLSR STA需要进入EMLSR模式，即EMLSR non-AP MLD将其它(指定)链路上的天线/空间流切换到接收初始控制帧的链路上，做好数据的收发准备。
应理解，上述图15所示的各个子字段的名称、顺序以及长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
还应理解，因为本申请实施例将上述指示信息(即EMLSR Initial Control子字段)放在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的用户信息字段中，所以可能出现MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧同时触发(trigger)多个EMLSR STA和非EMLSR STA的情况。因此，若AID12子字段对应的STA为EMLSR STA，则可以将其User Info字段内预留的一比特改为EMLSR Initial Control子字段；若AID12子字段对应的STA为非EMLSR STA，也可以将其User Info字段的预留比特改为EMLSR Initial Control子字段，通过将EMLSR Initial Control子字段的值置0来指示当前MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧为普通控制帧。(对应每个用户信息字段中都携带指示信息的实现方式)。或者，若AID12子字段对应的STA为EMLSR STA，则可以将其User Info字段内预留的一比特改为EMLSR Initial Control子字段；若AID12子字段对应的STA为非EMLSR STA，则可以不修改该User Info子字段内的预留比特。(对应EMLSR站点对应的用户信息字段中携带指示信息的实现方式)。
可选的，本申请实施例可以只允许AP MLD在接收能力完全链路上发送携带上述指示信息(或EMLSR Initial Control子字段)的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。当然，本申请实施例也可以允许AP MLD在接收能力完全链路和接收能力受限链路上都发送携带上述指示信息(或EMLSR Initial Control子字段)的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，但接收能力受限链路上发送的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中该指示信息设置为第一值，指示该接收能力受限链路上的站点接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是初始控制帧。这是因为，接收能力受限链路上的站点只能接收初始控制帧。
可选的，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧后，根据用户信息字段中携带的指示信息确定自己接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。如果EMLSR non-AP MLD确定自己接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是初始控制帧，则EMLSR non-AP MLD可以将其它(指定)链路上的天线/空间流切换到接收初始控制帧的链路上；以做好数据的收发准备。如果EMLSR non-AP MLD确定自己接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧不是初始控制帧，则EMLSR non-AP MLD可以回复MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的响应帧。
本申请实施例在EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称的情况下，通过在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的用户信息字段中携带指示信息，来指示对于某个站点而言接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否是初始控制帧；以使EMLSR non-AP MLD的接收能力完全链路上的EMLSR STA可以分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧，从而确定自己接下来的行为。另外，在用户信息字段中携带指示信息，可以针对不同站点指示不同的信息，实现更灵活。比如，在用户信息字段中携带指示信息可以实现同一个MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧对于一部分EMLSR STA而言为初始控制帧，而对另一部分EMLSR STA而言为普通控制帧。
实施例五
本申请实施例主要介绍在EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置不对称的情况下，通过在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的公共信息字段中携带指示信息，以使接收能力完全链路上的STA分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。
可选的，本申请实施例五可以与前述实施例一至实施例三中任一实施例结合一起实施，也可以单独实施例，本申请不做限制。
参见图16，图16是本申请实施例提供的EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法的另一示意流程图。其中，本申请实施例中EMLSR non-AP MLD的天线能力配置是不对称的，即EMLSR non-AP MLD的每条链路上各一条天线，其中一条天线为常规天线，其它天线为受限天线。常规天线所在的链路称为接收能力完全链路(RX full capability link)，而受限天线所在链路称为接收能力受限链路(RX limitation link)。如图16所示，该EMLSR模式下帧类型指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S501，AP MLD生成控制帧，该控制帧中包括公共信息字段，该公共信息字段中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。
S502，AP MLD发送该控制帧。
S503，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收该控制帧。
S504，EMLSR non-AP MLD确定接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。
其中，上述控制帧为MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。
其中，EMLSR non-AP MLD与AP MLD之间存在多条链路，这多条链路中包括至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路。
可选的，AP MLD可以生成并发送MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中可以包括公共信息字段，该公共信息字段中包括指示信息，用于指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。相应的，EMLSR non-AP MLD接收该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧，并根据该公共信息字段的指示，确定自己接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。如果EMLSR non-AP MLD确定自己接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是初始控制帧，则EMLSR non-AP MLD可以将其它(指定)链路上的天线/空间流切换到接收初始控制帧的链路上；以做好数据的收发准备。如果EMLSR non-AP MLD确定自己接收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧不是初始控制帧，则EMLSR non-AP MLD可以回复MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的响应帧。
可选的，上述指示信息的长度可以为1比特，当该指示信息设置为第一值时，表示该控制帧(即MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧)是初始控制帧；当该指示信息设置为第二值时，表示该控制帧(即MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧)不是初始控制帧。其中，第一值为1，第二值为0；或者，第一值为0，第二值为1；本申请实施例不做限制。
示例性的，上述指示信息可以通过公共信息(Common Info)字段的1个预留比特来表示，为便于描述，该指示信息可以称为EMLSR初始控制(EMLSR Initial Control)子字段。参见图17，图17是本申请实施例提供的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中公共信息字段的帧格式示意图。如图17所示，MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧中公共信息字段包括但不限于1比特的EMLSR初始控制子字段。当EMLSR Initial Control子字段设置为0时，表示当前MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧为普通控制帧，收到该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的EMLSR STA不需要进入EMLSR模式，只需要回复对应的响应帧。当EMLSR Initial Control子字段设置为1时，表示当前MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧为初始控制帧，收到该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的EMLSR STA需要进入EMLSR模式， 即EMLSR non-AP MLD将其它(指定)链路上的天线/空间流切换到接收初始控制帧的链路上，做好数据的收发准备。
应理解，上述图17所示的各个子字段的名称、顺序以及长度均是示例，本申请实施例对此不做限制。
还应理解，本申请实施例将上述指示信息(即EMLSR Initial Control子字段)放在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的Common Info字段中，所以每个收到该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的STA都能读到这个指示信息(即EMLSR Initial Control子字段)，因此该指示信息(即EMLSR Initial Control子字段)用于统一指示所有STA当前收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧。若接收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的STA为非EMLSR STA，则可忽略该EMLSR Initial Control子字段；若为接收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的STA为EMLSR STA，则按照EMLSR Initial Control子字段的值做出相应的反应。
本申请实施例通过在MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧的公共信息字段中携带指示信息，来指示该MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否是初始控制帧；可以解决在天线配置不对称的EMLSR模式下接收能力完全链路上的STA无法分辨收到的MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧是否为初始控制帧的问题，从而可以使EMLSR non-AP MLD明确自己接收到MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧后的行为。
此外，在某些情况下，non-AP MLD中的某两条链路可能无法同时传输接收，即一条链路上的STA正在传输时，另一条链路上的STA没办法满足EHT的接收要求，所以引入一种非同时传输接收(Nonsimultaneous Transmit and Receive,NSTR)能力。出现这种情况的原因可能是两条链路的频谱间距太近导致一条链路上的STA在传输时另一条链路上的STA接收干扰过大。因此，若non-AP MLD的两条链路存在NSTR能力，该non-AP MLD和它关联的AP MLD都要确保其中一条链路上的STA的传输时间不会和另一条链路上的STA的接收时间重叠。但对于该non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD而言，non-AP MLD的具有NSTR能力的某些链路上的STA都可能因为某些原因(包括但不限于：点对点传输(P2P)，即该STA在本链路上和它关联的AP MLD以外的设备进行通信)出现不可用的情况。因此，当non-AP MLD的具有NSTR能力的某些链路上的STA因为某些原因出现不可用的情况时，若关联的AP MLD仍对该STA发起传输，会影响正常通信。
本申请实施例提供的上述链路状态指示方法也可以解决上述问题，具体参见实施例六。
实施例六
本申请实施例主要介绍如果non-AP MLD的某些链路对(link pair)存在NSTR能力，即NSTR link pair，且该NSTR link pair上的某个STA因为一些原因暂时不可用，或者结束不可用时，该non-AP MLD如何通知与其关联的AP MLD。
NSTR link pair指的是：对于MLD内的两条链路，如果该MLD的一条链路上的STA正在传输时，它的另一条链路上的STA没办法满足EHT的接收要求，则这两条链路组成一个NSTR link pair。
举例来说，non-AP MLD的某对NSTR link pair上的某个STA(STA1)可能和其它non-AP MLD的STA或non-AP STA(STA3)建立了P2P连接，例如通道直接链路建立(Tunneled Direct-link Setup,TDLS)。此时若STA1对STA3发起传输，和该non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD并不知道此次传输。因此，在STA1对STA3进行P2P传输时，关联的AP MLD可能同时对这个NSTR link pair上的另一个STA(STA2)发起传输，由于NSTR的特性，此时STA2无法正常接收AP MLD发送的数据。换句话说，当non-AP MLD的某对NSTR link pair上的某 个STA对其关联的AP MLD以外的设备进行传输时，该non-AP MLD的这对NSTR link pair上的所有STA都无法正常接收来自关联的AP MLD的传输数据，即这对NSTR link pair上的所有STA都不可用。然而，根据现有标准和技术，AP MLD并不知道当前与其关联的non-AP MLD的NSTR link pair是否出现了上述不可用的情况。那么，若AP MLD在上述不可用出现时仍向non-AP MLD NSTR link pair上的STA传输数据，则该STA无法正确接收并回复AP MLD。AP MLD因为未收到正确的回复，则可能重复发送相应的帧，这样将导致资源的浪费。
如图20所示，本申请提供的链路状态指示方法，具体的，NSTR link pair中的链路(以下简称链路)状态指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S601，non-AP MLD生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。
S602，non-AP MLD发送该第三帧。
可选的，当non-AP MLD发现自己的全部或部分链路的状态发生变化时，比如：对于和non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD而言，non-AP MLD中的至少一条链路(上的站点)不可使用或从不可用恢复到可用；non-AP MLD可以生成第三帧。该第三帧中可以携带第四指示信息，该第四指示信息可以用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。可选的，该第三帧还可以携带第三指示信息，该第三指示信息可以用于指示是否存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化。
non-AP MLD可以在任意一条可用的链路上发送该第三帧。可选的，non-AP MLD在发送完该第三帧后，或者发送完该第三帧的一段时间后，non-AP MLD的链路的状态才发生变化。也可以是，non-AP MLD在发送该第三帧之前，或者发送该第三帧前的一段时间，non-AP MLD的链路的状态就发生了变化。
可选的，上述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括但不限于：链路禁用，和non-AP MLD中不可用的NSTR链路变为可用的链路。
为更好地理解上述第三指示信息和第四指示信息的指示方式，下面对其可能的实现方式进行举例说明。
实现方式一
上述第三指示信息可以用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，上述第四指示信息可以用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路。示例性的，第四指示信息可以通过比特位图来指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路，也就是说，比特位图中一个比特对应一条链路，当该比特位图中的某个比特设置为1时，表示该比特对应的链路是可用的链路。或者，第四指示信息也可以通过链路标识(link ID)来指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路，也就是说，链路标识所标识的链路为可用的链路。本申请实施例不做限制。
可选的，该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息可以位于HT控制字段的AP援助请求(AP assistance request，AAR)控制子字段中。举例来说，可以利用AAR控制子字段中的预留比特来指示是否存在non-AP MLD的链路的状态发生变化，为便于描述，这个预留比特可称为链路更新(Link Update)子字段；并可以复用AAR控制子字段中的援助AP链路标识比特位图(Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap)来指示non-AP MLD中可用的具体链路。
参见图21a，图21a是本申请实施例提供的AAR控制子字段的一帧格式示意图。如图21a所示，该AAR控制子字段包括但不限于：AP链路标识比特位图(Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap)和链路更新(Link Update)子字段。其中，AP链路标识比特位图可以为16比特；链路更新 子字段可以为1比特；其中，当Link Update子字段设置为1时(即上述第三指示信息)，指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，也就是说可能出现了链路不可用或恢复可用的情况。Link Update子字段设置为0时，说明不存在链路状态变化。应理解，Link Update子字段置0表示存在链路状态变化，还是置1表示存在链路状态变化，本申请实施例不做限制。当Link Update子字段设置为1时，Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap(即上述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为non-AP MLD中可用的链路。应理解，如果Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap中所有比特均为0，说明non-AP MLD的所有链路都不可用，或者说不存在可用的链路，也就是说non-AP MLD中可用的链路数为0，或者说，整个non-AP MLD不可用。
本申请实施例通过在AAR控制子字段中增加non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化的指示(即Link Update子字段)，并复用Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap，但修改Assisted AP Link ID Bitmap的含义以指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路。无需新设计帧格式和流程，减少信令开销。
可选的，该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息可以位于聚合控制(Aggregated-control，A-control)子字段中。举例来说，可以重新设计一种A-Control子字段变种(variant)，用于携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息。
参见图21b，图21b是本申请实施例提供的A-Control子字段的一帧格式示意图。如图9b所示，该A-Control子字段包括但不限于：链路标识比特位图(Link ID Bitmap)和链路更新(Link Update)子字段。其中，链路标识比特位图可以为16比特；链路更新子字段可以为1比特。其中，Link Update子字段的取值和含义可参考前述图9a的描述，此处不赘述。当Link Update子字段设置为1时，Link ID Bitmap(即上述第四指示信息)中置1的比特所对应的链路为non-AP MLD中可用的链路。应理解，如果Link ID Bitmap中所有比特均为0，说明non-AP MLD中不存在可用的链路，也就是说non-AP MLD中可用的链路数为0，或者说，整个non-AP MLD不可用。还应理解，Link ID Bitmap中置0的比特表示可用的链路，还是置1的比特表示可用的链路，本申请实施例不做限制。
本申请实施例通过新设计一种A-Control子字段来携带第三指示信息和第四指示信息，其含义清晰，并且传统站点不会发生误读(因为传统站点读不懂新设计的A-Control子字段)。
上述内容详细阐述了本申请实施例中发送端的流程，在本申请的另一些实施例中，对应前述发送端的流程(步骤S601和步骤S602)，接收端的链路状态指示方法包括但不限于以下步骤：
S603，AP MLD接收该第三帧。该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。可选的，若该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路是否发生状态变化；具体的，第三指示信息和第四指示信息的实现方式参考前文的描述，此处不再赘述。
S604，AP MLD根据该第三帧中的第四指示信息，确定non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
可选的，与non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD接收到上述第三帧后，根据该第三帧中携带的第三指示信息和第四指示信息，确定non-AP MLD中可用的链路；具体的，AP MLD可以首先根据第三指示信息获得non-AP MLD的链路是否发生状态变化，再结合第四指示信息获得non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。当AP(或AP MLD)端收到non-AP MLD(或其某些链路)进入不可用状态的通知时，AP端不应再在不可用的链路上给该non-AP MLD发送初始控制帧，直到收到该不可用的链路恢复可用通知为止。
当non-AP MLD发送了不可用的链路恢复可用的通知后，这些恢复可用的链路上的STA 可以立即恢复到正常收发状态，或者等待一个规定的时间T(例如一个短帧间间隔(short interframe space，SIFS))后再恢复成正常收发状态。
本申请实施例在non-AP MLD或其某些链路上的STA因为某些原因暂时不可用的情况下，主动上报自己的链路的状态变化，并上报发生变化的链路，以使AP MLD及时获知与其关联的non-AP MLD的链路的状态变化和发生变化的链路，从而避免AP MLD在non-AP MLD的不可用链路上向non-AP MLD发起传输，从而减少资源的浪费。
上述内容详细阐述了本申请提供的方法，为了便于实施本申请实施例的上述方案，本申请实施例还提供了相应的装置或设备。
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对AP MLD和non-AP MLD进行功能模块的划分，例如，可以对应各个功能划分各个功能模块，也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理模块中。上述集成的模块既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能模块的形式实现。需要说明的是，本申请实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。下面将结合图18和图19详细描述本申请实施例的通信装置。其中，该通信装置是AP MLD和non-AP MLD，进一步的，该通信装置可以为AP MLD中的装置；或者，该通信装置为non-AP MLD中的装置。
在采用集成的单元的情况下，参见图18，图18是本申请实施例提供的通信装置的结构示意图。如图18所示，该通信装置包括处理单元11和收发单元12。
在本申请的一些实施例中，该通信装置可以是non-AP MLD或non-AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片等。即该通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中non-AP MLD执行的步骤或功能等。
第一种设计中，处理单元11，用于生成第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；收发单元12，用于发送该第一帧。
可选的，上述收发单元12，还用于发送第二帧，该第二帧中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD可用。
应理解，第一种设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例一，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例一中EMLSR non-AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
第二种设计中，处理单元11，用于生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；收发单元12，用于发送该第三帧。可选的，该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化。该non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。
应理解，第二种设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例二，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例二中EMLSR non-AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
第三种设计中，处理单元11，用于在EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，生成第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；收发单元12，用于向AP MLD发送该第一EML OMN帧。
应理解，第三种设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例三，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例三中EMLSR non-AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
第四种设计中，收发单元12，用于接收控制帧，该控制帧中包括第一用户信息字段，该第一用户信息字段中包括关联标识符12子字段和指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该关联标识符12子字段所指示的站点接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧，EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路；处理单元11，用于确定接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。其中，该控制帧为MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。
应理解，第四种设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例四，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例四中EMLSR non-AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
第五种设计中，收发单元12，用于接收控制帧，该控制帧中包括公共信息字段，该公共信息字段中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该控制帧是否为初始控制帧，EMLSR non-AP MLD中存在至少一条接收能力完全链路和至少一条接收能力受限链路；处理单元11，用于确定接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧。其中，该控制帧为MU-RTS帧或BSRP帧。
应理解，第五种设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例五，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例五中EMLSR non-AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
第六种设计中，处理单元11，用于生成第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路。收发单元12，用于发送所述第三帧。
应理解，第六种设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例六，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例六中non-AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
复用图18，在本申请的另一些实施例中，该通信装置可以是AP MLD或AP MLD中的芯片，比如Wi-Fi芯片等。即该通信装置可以用于执行上文方法实施例中AP MLD执行的步骤或功能等。
一种设计中，收发单元12，用于接收第一帧，该第一帧中包括第一指示信息，该第一指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD针对AP MLD禁用；处理单元11，用于根据该第一帧中的该第一指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD禁用。
可选的，上述收发单元12，还用于接收第二帧，该第二帧中包括第二指示信息，该第二指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD可用。
应理解，该设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例一，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例一中AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
一种设计中，收发单元12，用于接收第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；处理单元11，用于根据该第三帧中的该第三指示信息和该第四指示信息，确定EMLSRnon-AP MLD中可用的链路。可选的，第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化。该non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD。
应理解，该设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例二，并且该通信装置中的各个单元 的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例二中AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
一种设计中，当EMLSR non-AP MLD与关联的AP MLD通过交换EML OMN帧进入EMLSR模式后，收发单元12，用于接收第一EML OMN帧，该第一EML OMN帧包括EMLSR模式子字段和EMLSR链路比特位图，该EMLSR模式子字段设置为1，该第一EML OMN帧用于通知更新的EMLSR链路；处理单元11，用于根据该第一EML OMN帧，确定EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
应理解，该设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例三，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例三中AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
一种设计中，处理单元11，用于生成控制帧，该控制帧中包括第一用户信息字段，该第一用户信息字段中包括关联标识符12子字段和指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该关联标识符12子字段所指示的站点接收到的该控制帧是否为初始控制帧；收发单元12，用于发送该控制帧。
应理解，该设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例四，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例四中AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
一种设计中，处理单元11，用于生成控制帧，该控制帧中包括公共信息字段，该公共信息字段中包括指示信息，该指示信息用于指示该控制帧是否为初始控制帧；收发单元12，用于发送该控制帧。
应理解，该设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例五，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例五中AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
一种设计中，收发单元12，用于接收第三帧，该第三帧中包括第四指示信息，该第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；可选的，若该第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，该第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路是否发生状态变化；具体的，第三指示信息和第四指示信息的实现方式参考前文的描述，此处不再赘述。处理单元11，用于根据该第三帧中的第四指示信息，确定non-AP MLD中可用的链路。可选的，与non-AP MLD关联的AP MLD的收发单元12接收到上述第三帧后，所述处理单元11根据该第三帧中携带的第三指示信息和第四指示信息，确定non-AP MLD中可用的链路；
应理解，该种设计中的通信装置可对应执行前述实施例六，并且该通信装置中的各个单元的上述操作或功能分别为了实现前述实施例六中AP MLD的相应操作，为了简洁，在此不再赘述。
以上介绍了本申请实施例的AP MLD和non-AP MLD，以下介绍该AP MLD和non-AP MLD可能的产品形态。应理解，但凡具备上述图18该的通信装置的功能的任何形态的产品都落入本申请实施例的保护范围。还应理解，以下介绍仅为举例，不限制本申请实施例的AP MLD和non-AP MLD的产品形态仅限于此。
作为一种可能的产品形态，本申请实施例该的AP MLD和non-AP MLD，可以由一般性的总线体系结构来实现。
为了便于说明，参见图19，图19是本申请实施例提供的通信装置1000的结构示意图。 该通信装置1000可以为AP MLD和non-AP MLD，或其中的芯片。图19仅示出了通信装置1000的主要部件。除处理器1001和收发器1002之外，该通信装置还可以进一步包括存储器1003、以及输入输出装置(图未示意)。
处理器1001主要用于对通信协议以及通信数据进行处理，以及对整个通信装置进行控制，执行软件程序，处理软件程序的数据。存储器1003主要用于存储软件程序和数据。收发器1002可以包括控制电路和天线，控制电路主要用于基带信号与射频信号的转换以及对射频信号的处理。天线主要用于收发电磁波形式的射频信号。输入输出装置，例如触摸屏、显示屏，键盘等主要用于接收用户输入的数据以及对用户输出数据。
当通信装置开机后，处理器1001可以读取存储器1003中的软件程序，解释并执行软件程序的指令，处理软件程序的数据。当需要通过无线发送数据时，处理器1001对待发送的数据进行基带处理后，输出基带信号至射频电路，射频电路将基带信号进行射频处理后将射频信号通过天线以电磁波的形式向外发送。当有数据发送到通信装置时，射频电路通过天线接收到射频信号，将射频信号转换为基带信号，并将基带信号输出至处理器1001，处理器1001将基带信号转换为数据并对该数据进行处理。
在另一种实现中，该的射频电路和天线可以独立于进行基带处理的处理器而设置，例如在分布式场景中，射频电路和天线可以与独立于通信装置，呈拉远式的布置。
其中，处理器1001、收发器1002、以及存储器1003可以通过通信总线连接。
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例一中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图5中的步骤S101，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图5中的步骤S102和步骤S105，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例一中AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图5中步骤S104，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图5中的步骤S103和步骤S106，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例二中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图8中的步骤S201，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图8中的步骤S202，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例二中AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图8中步骤S204，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图8中的步骤S203，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例三中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图13中的步骤S301，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图13中的步骤S302，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例三中AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图13中步骤S304，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图13中的步骤S303，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例四中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图14中的步骤S404，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图14中的步骤S403，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例四中AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图14中步骤S401，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器 1002可以用于执行图14中的步骤S402，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例五中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图16中的步骤S504，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图16中的步骤S503，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
另一种设计中，通信装置1000可以用于执行前述实施例五中AP MLD的功能：处理器1001可以用于执行图16中步骤S501，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；收发器1002可以用于执行图16中的步骤S502，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
在上述任一种设计中，处理器1001中可以包括用于实现接收和发送功能的收发器。例如该收发器可以是收发电路，或者是接口，或者是接口电路。用于实现接收和发送功能的收发电路、接口或接口电路可以是分开的，也可以集成在一起。上述收发电路、接口或接口电路可以用于代码/数据的读写，或者，上述收发电路、接口或接口电路可以用于信号的传输或传递。
在上述任一种设计中，处理器1001可以存有指令，该指令可为计算机程序，计算机程序在处理器1001上运行，可使得通信装置1000执行上述任一方法实施例中描述的方法。计算机程序可能固化在处理器1001中，该种情况下，处理器1001可能由硬件实现。
在一种实现方式中，通信装置1000可以包括电路，该电路可以实现前述方法实施例中发送或接收或者通信的功能。本申请中描述的处理器和收发器可实现在集成电路(integrated circuit，IC)、模拟IC、无线射频集成电路(radio frequency integrated circuit，RFIC)、混合信号IC、专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、印刷电路板(printed circuit board，PCB)、电子设备等上。该处理器和收发器也可以用各种IC工艺技术来制造，例如互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal oxide semiconductor，CMOS)、N型金属氧化物半导体(nMetal-oxide-semiconductor，NMOS)、P型金属氧化物半导体(positive channel metal oxide semiconductor，PMOS)、双极结型晶体管(bipolar junction transistor，BJT)、双极CMOS(BiCMOS)、硅锗(SiGe)、砷化镓(GaAs)等。
本申请中描述的通信装置的范围并不限于此，而且通信装置的结构可以不受图19的限制。通信装置可以是独立的设备或者可以是较大设备的一部分。例如该通信装置可以是：
(1)独立的集成电路IC，或芯片，或，芯片系统或子系统；
(2)具有一个或多个IC的集合，可选的，该IC集合也可以包括用于存储数据，计算机程序的存储部件；
(3)ASIC，例如调制解调器(Modem)；
(4)可嵌入在其他设备内的模块；
(5)接收机、终端、智能终端、蜂窝电话、无线设备、手持机、移动单元、车载设备、网络设备、云设备、人工智能设备等等；
(6)其他等等。
作为一种可能的产品形态，本申请实施例该的AP MLD和non-AP MLD，可以由通用处理器来实现。
实现non-AP MLD的通用处理器包括处理电路和与该处理电路内部连接通信的输入输出接口。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例一中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图5中的步骤S101，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图5中的步骤S102和步骤S105，和/或用于本文所描述的 技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例二中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图8中的步骤S201，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图8中的步骤S202，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例三中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图13中的步骤S301，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图13中的步骤S302，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例四中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图14中的步骤S404，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图14中的步骤S403，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例五中EMLSR non-AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图16中的步骤S504，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图16中的步骤S503，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
实现第AP MLD的通用处理器包括处理电路和与该处理电路内部连接通信的输入输出接口。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例一中AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图5中步骤S104，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图5中的步骤S103和步骤S106，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例二中AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图8中步骤S204，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图8中的步骤S203，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例三中AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图13中步骤S304，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图13中的步骤S303，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例四中AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图14中步骤S401，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图14中的步骤S402，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
一种设计中，该通用处理器可以用于执行前述实施例五中AP MLD的功能。具体地，处理电路可以用于执行图16中步骤S501，和/或用于执行本文所描述的技术的其它过程；输入输出接口可以用于执行图16中的步骤S502，和/或用于本文所描述的技术的其它过程。
应理解，上述各种产品形态的通信装置，具有上述方法实施例中AP MLD或EMLSR non-AP MLD的任意功能，此处不再赘述。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序代码，当上述处理器执行该计算机程序代码时，电子设备执行前述任一实施例中的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种计算机程序产品，当该计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行前述任一实施例中的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种通信装置，该装置可以以芯片的产品形态存在，该装置的结构中包括处理器和接口电路，该处理器用于通过接收电路与其它装置通信，使得该装置执行前述任一实施例中的方法。
本申请实施例还提供一种无线通信系统，包括AP MLD和non-AP MLD，该AP MLD和non-AP MLD可以执行前述任一实施例中的方法。
结合本申请公开内容所描述的方法或者算法的步骤可以硬件的方式来实现，也可以是由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成，软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、闪存、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable ROM，EPROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM，EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器，从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息，且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然，存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外，该ASIC可以位于核心网接口设备中。当然，处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于核心网接口设备中。
本领域技术人员应该可以意识到，在上述一个或多个示例中，本申请所描述的功能可以用硬件、软件、固件或它们的任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时，可以将这些功能存储在计算机可读介质中或者作为计算机可读介质上的一个或多个指令或代码进行传输。计算机可读介质包括计算机可读存储介质和通信介质，其中通信介质包括便于从一个地方向另一个地方传送计算机程序的任何介质。存储介质可以是通用或专用计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。
以上所述的具体实施方式，对本申请的目的、技术方案和有益效果进行了进一步详细说明，所应理解的是，以上所述仅为本申请的具体实施方式而已，并不用于限定本申请的保护范围，凡在本申请的技术方案的基础之上，所做的任何修改、等同替换、改进等，均应包括在本申请的保护范围之内。

Claims (23)

  1. 一种链路状态指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    非接入点多链路设备non-AP MLD生成第三帧，所述第三帧中包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；
    所述non-AP MLD发送所述第三帧。
  2. 一种链路状态指示方法，其特征在于，包括：
    接入点多链路设备AP MLD接收第三帧，所述第三帧中包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；
    所述AP MLD根据所述第三帧中的所述第四指示信息，确定所述non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
  3. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，所述non-AP MLD是支持模式的non-AP MLD。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括所述链路禁用；
    所述第三指示信息用于指示存在链路禁用；
    所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中禁用的链路。
  5. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    所述第三指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中从不可用变为可用的EMLSR链路。
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括所述链路禁用，或non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    所述第三指示信息具体用于指示存在链路禁用，且所述non-AP MLD中不存在不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    或者，所述第三指示信息具体用于指示不存在链路禁用，且所述non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的链路。
  7. 根据权利要求3-6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三指示信息和所述第四指示信息可以位于所述第三帧的高吞吐率HT控制字段的AP援助请求控制子字段中；
    或者，所述第三指示信息和所述第四指示信息可以位于所述第三帧的聚合控制A-control子字段中。
  8. 根据权利要求3-6中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三帧为增强型多链路EML操作模式通知OMN帧，所述第三指示信息和所述第四指示信息可以位于所述第三帧的EML控制字段中，所述EML控制字段中包括的EMLSR模式子字段设置为1。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述EML控制字段中还包括以下一项或多项信息：禁用的开始时间，可用的开始时间，禁用的结束时间，禁用的持续时间，所述EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路的收发能力。
  10. 根据权利要求1-9中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第四指示信息为比特位图，所述第四指示信息的一个比特对应一条链路；
    当所述第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第一值时，用于指示该比特对应的链路是可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；当所述第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第二值时，用于指示该比特对应的链路是不可用的链路或状态未发生变化的链路。
  11. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    处理单元，用于生成第三帧，所述第三帧中包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；
    收发单元，用于发送所述第三帧。
  12. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括：
    收发单元，用于接收第三帧，所述第三帧中包括第四指示信息，所述第四指示信息用于指示non-AP MLD中可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；
    处理单元，用于根据所述第三帧中的所述第四指示信息，确定所述non-AP MLD中可用的链路。
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第三帧中还包括第三指示信息，所述第三指示信息用于指示存在non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化，所述non-AP MLD是支持EMLSR模式的non-AP MLD或支持NSTR模式的non-AP MLD。
  14. 根据权利要求13所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括所述链路禁用；
    所述第三指示信息用于指示存在链路禁用；
    所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中禁用的链路。
  15. 根据权利要求13所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    所述第三指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中可用的链路，或者所述第四指示信息用于指示所述non-AP MLD中从不可用变为可用的链路。
  16. 根据权利要求13所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述non-AP MLD的链路发生状态变化包括所述链路禁用，或non-AP MLD中不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    所述第三指示信息具体用于指示存在链路禁用，且所述non-AP MLD中不存在不可用的链路变为可用的链路；
    或者，所述第三指示信息具体用于指示不存在链路禁用，且所述non-AP MLD中存在不可用的链路变为可用的链路。
  17. 根据权利要求13-16中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第三指示信息和所述第四指示信息可以位于所述第三帧的高吞吐率HT控制字段的AP援助请求控制子字段中；
    或者，所述第三指示信息和所述第四指示信息可以位于所述第三帧的聚合控制A-control子字段中。
  18. 根据权利要求13-16中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第三帧为增强型多链路EML操作模式通知OMN帧，所述第三指示信息和所述第四指示信息可以位于所述第三帧的EML控制字段中，所述EML控制字段中包括的EMLSR模式子字段设置为1。
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述EML控制字段中还包括以下一项或多项信息：禁用的开始时间，可用的开始时间，禁用的结束时间，禁用的持续时间，所述EMLSR non-AP MLD中可用的链路的收发能力。
  20. 根据权利要求11-19中任一项所述的通信装置，其特征在于，所述第四指示信息为比特位图，所述第四指示信息的一个比特对应一条链路；
    当所述第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第一值时，用于指示该比特对应的链路是可用的链路或状态发生变化的链路；当所述第四指示信息中的一个比特设置为第二值时，用于指示该比特对应的链路是不可用的链路或状态未发生变化的链路。
  21. 一种通信装置，其特征在于，包括处理器和收发器，其中所述收发器用于收发帧，所述处理器用于执行程序指令，以使所述通信装置执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法。
  22. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有程序指令，当所述程序指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法。
  23. 一种包含程序指令的计算机程序产品，其特征在于，当所述程序指令在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行如权利要求1-10中任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2023/073528 2022-02-18 2023-01-28 Emlsr模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置 WO2023155661A1 (zh)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202210153355.9 2022-02-18
CN202210153355 2022-02-18
CN202210504981.8A CN116669230A (zh) 2022-02-18 2022-05-10 Emlsr模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置
CN202210504981.8 2022-05-10

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023155661A1 true WO2023155661A1 (zh) 2023-08-24

Family

ID=87577521

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/073528 WO2023155661A1 (zh) 2022-02-18 2023-01-28 Emlsr模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (2) CN116600368B (zh)
WO (1) WO2023155661A1 (zh)

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN113395750A (zh) * 2020-03-13 2021-09-14 华为技术有限公司 一种多链路通信方法及装置
WO2021182892A1 (ko) * 2020-03-11 2021-09-16 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 멀티 링크 통신을 수행하기 위한 기법
CN113747502A (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-03 华为技术有限公司 多链路试关联方法及相关装置

Family Cites Families (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11510269B2 (en) * 2019-07-01 2022-11-22 Qualcomm Incorporated Signaling for multi-link communication in a wireless local area network (WLAN)
CN113676298B (zh) * 2020-05-14 2023-08-08 华为技术有限公司 多链路通信方法及相关装置
CN113891495A (zh) * 2020-07-03 2022-01-04 华为技术有限公司 多链路建立方法及通信装置
US11757565B2 (en) * 2020-07-22 2023-09-12 Nxp Usa, Inc. Operation of eMLSR and eMLMR
GB2613654A (en) * 2021-12-13 2023-06-14 Canon Kk Communication methods and device to manage eligible enhanced multi-link multi-radio links

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2021182892A1 (ko) * 2020-03-11 2021-09-16 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 멀티 링크 통신을 수행하기 위한 기법
CN113395750A (zh) * 2020-03-13 2021-09-14 华为技术有限公司 一种多链路通信方法及装置
CN113747502A (zh) * 2020-05-27 2021-12-03 华为技术有限公司 多链路试关联方法及相关装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116634529B (zh) 2024-02-13
CN116600368A (zh) 2023-08-15
CN116600368B (zh) 2024-03-01
CN116634529A (zh) 2023-08-22

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP2023549790A (ja) Ｐｐｄｕ内の空間再使用パラメータフィールドを決定する方法、および関連装置
TWI792824B (zh) 時間資源分配和接收方法及相關裝置
WO2023155661A1 (zh) Emlsr模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置
CN116133043A (zh) 多链路通信方法、装置及可读存储介质
CN116669230A (zh) Emlsr模式下链路状态指示方法及相关装置
WO2022228400A1 (zh) Emlsr模式下信标帧传输方法及相关装置
WO2023207223A1 (zh) 多链路的重配置方法及装置
WO2023035848A1 (zh) 介质同步时延计时器设置方法及相关装置
US11963083B2 (en) Communication method and apparatus
TWI832377B (zh) 通信方法及相關裝置
WO2023236821A1 (zh) 多链路通信方法及装置
WO2023011414A1 (zh) 无线帧发送方法及装置、无线帧接收方法及装置
WO2022257836A1 (zh) Ppdu传输方法及相关装置
WO2022262675A1 (zh) 基于多链路通信的探测请求方法及装置
KR20230153996A (ko) 다중링크 통신 설정 방법 및 관련 장치
JP2023553662A (ja) 空間再利用パラメータを指示し空間再利用パラメータフィールドを決定する方法および装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23755665

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1